Bachelor of Engineering

Transcription

Bachelor of Engineering
Bachelor of
Engineering
School of Materials
and Mineral Resources
Engineering
Academic Session 2012/2013
USM Vision
Transforming Higher Education for a Sustainable Tomorrow
USM Mission
USM is a pioneering, transdisciplinary research intensive university
that empowers future talent and enables the bottom billions
to transform their socio-economic well being
STUDENT'S PERSONAL INFORMATION
Full Name
Identity Card (IC)/Passport No.
Current Address
Permanent Address
E-mail Address
Telephone No. (Residence)
Mobile Phone No. (if applicable)
School
Programme of Study
CONTENT
PAGE
I.
II.
III.
IV.
VISION AND MISSION………………………………………………………
STUDENT’S PERSONAL INFORMATION…………………………………
CONTENT …………………………………………………………………….
ACADEMIC CALENDAR ……………………………………………………
i
ii
iii
v
1.0
INTRODUCTION
1.1 History and Development ………………………………………………
1.2 Philosophy and Objectives ……………………………………………..
1.3 Outcome Based Education ……………………………………………..
1.4 Continuous Quality Improvement System ……………………………..
1.5 External Examiners …………………………………………………….
1.6 Industry Advisory Board ……………………………………………….
1.7 Division Industry and Community Network............................................
1.8 Stakeholder …………………………………………………………….
1.9 Teaching Delivery Method …………………………………………….
1.10 Course Code………………………………………………………........
1.11 Program Structure ……………………………………………..............
1.12 Course Offering ………………………………………………….........
1
1
3
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
7
8
ACADEMIC SYSTEM AND GENERAL INFORMATION
2.1 Course Registration .............…………………………………………..
2.2 Interpretation of Unit/Credit …………………………………………...
2.3 Examination System ……………………………………………………
2.4 Unit Exemption/Credit Transfer ………………………………………..
2.5 Academic Integrity………………………………………………………
2.6 USM Mentor Programme ……………………………………………….
2.7 Student Exchange Programme …………………………………………..
11
18
18
23
26
31
32
2.0
3.0
UNIVERSITY REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Summary of University Requirements …………………………………… 34
3.2 Bahasa Malaysia ………………………………………………………… 34
3.3 English Language ……………………………………………………….. 36
3.4 Local Students - Islamic and Asian Civilisation/Ethnic Relations/
Core Entrepreneurship ………………………………………………….. 38
3.5 International Students - Malaysian Studies/Option …………………….. 39
3.6 Third Language/Co-Curriculum/Skill Courses/Options………………… 40
4.0
SCHOOL OF MATERIALS AND MINERAL RESOURCES
ENGINEERING
4.1 Introduction ……………………………………………………………
4.2 Objective and Philosophy ……………………………………………..
4.3 Main Administrative Staff .……………………………………………
4.4 List of Academic Staff ……………………………………………….
4.5 External Examiners …………………………………….......................
4.6 Industry Advisory Panel……………………………………………....
4.7 Laboratory Facilities………………………………….........................
4.8 Job Opportunities…………………………………………………….
4.9 Postgraduate Studies & Research……………………………………
45
46
47
49
51
51
53
54
54
4.10 Programme for Bachelor of Engineering (Material Engineering)
Programme Objectives …………………………………..
Programme Outcomes …………………………………...
4.10.1
Curriculum Structure …………………………………….
4.10.2
Curriculum ……………………………………………….
4.10.3
Course-Programme Outcome Matrix …………………….
4.10.4
Course Description ……………………………………….
56
56
57
58
62
64
4.11 Programme for Bachelor of Engineering (Mineral Resources
Engineering)
Programme Objectives …………………………………..
Programme Outcomes …………………………………...
4.11.1
Curriculum Structure …………………………………….
4.11.2
Curriculum ……………………………………………….
4.11.3
Course-Programme Outcome Matrix …………………….
4.11.4
Course Description ……………………………………….
104
104
105
106
110
112
4.12 Programme for Bachelor of Engineering (Polymer Engineering)
Programme Objectives …………………………………..
Programme Outcomes …………………………………...
4.12.1
Curriculum Structure …………………………………….
4.12.2
Curriculum ……………………………………………….
4.12.3
Course-Programme Outcome Matrix …………………….
4.12.4
Course Description ……………………………………….
146
146
147
148
152
154
Index ……………………………………………………………………………
.........194
Students’ Feedback ……………………………………………………………………197
ACADEMIC CALENDAR 2012/2013 SESSION
[ 10 SEPTEMBER 2012 – 8 SEPTEMBER 2013 (52 WEEKS ]
FOR ALL PRGRAMMES [EXCEPT IN THE MEDICAL AND DENTAL SCIENCES PROGRAMMES]
•
•
WEEK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 - 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43-52
New Student Registration = 1 – 2 September 2012
Orientation Week = 3-9 September 2012
SEMESTER
SEMESTER I
ACTIVITY
Duration of
Teaching and
Learning
Mid Semester Break
SEMESTER I
Duration of
Teaching and
Learning
Revision Week
Examinations
INTER-SEMESTER BREAK I & II
SEMESTER II
Duration of
Teaching and
Learning
Mid Semester Break
SEMESTER II
Duration of
Teaching and
Learning
Revision Week
Examinations
Inter-Academic Session Break/
Industrial Training/ KSCP
DATE
Monday, 10/09/12 - Friday, 14/09/12
Monday, 17/09/12 - Friday, 21/09/12
Monday, 24/09/11 - Friday, 28/09/12
Monday, 01/10/12 - Friday, 05/10/12
Monday, 08/10/12 - Friday, 12/10/12
Monday, 15/10/12 - Friday, 19/10/12
Monday, 22/10/12 - Friday, 26/10/12
Monday, 29/10/12 - Friday, 024/11/12
Monday, 05/11/12 – Friday, 09/11/12
Saturday, 10/11/12 - Sunday,18/11/12
Monday, 19/11/12 – Friday, 23/11/12
Monday, 26/11/12 - Friday, 30/11/12
Monday, 03/12/12 - Friday, 07/12/12
Monday, 10/12/11 - Friday, 14/12/12
Monday, 17/12/12 – Friday, 21/12/12
Saturday, 22/12/12 – Monday,01/01/13
Wednesday, 02/01/13 - Saturday,05/01/13
Monday, 07/01/13 - Saturday, 12/01/13
Monday, 14/01/13 - Friday, 18/01/13
Saturday, 19/01/13 - Sunday, 17/02/13
Monday, 18/02/13 - Friday, 22/02/13
Monday, 25/02/13 - Friday, 01/03/13
Monday, 04/03/13 - Friday, 08/03/13
Monday, 11/03/13 - Friday, 15/03/13
Monday, 18/03/13 - Friday, 22/03/13
Monday, 25/03/13 – Friday, 29/03/13
Monday, 01/04/13 – Friday, 05/04/13
Saturday, 06/04/13 - Sunday, 14/04/13
Monday,15/04/13 - Friday 19/04/13
Monday, 22/04/13 - Friday, 26/04/13
Monday, 29/04/13 - Friday, 03/05/13
Monday, 06/05/13 - Friday, 10/05/13
Monday, 13/05/13 - Friday, 17/05/13
Monday, 20/05/13 - Friday, 24/05/13
Monday, 27/05/13 - Friday, 31/05/13
Saturday, 01/06/13 - Sunday, 09/06/13
Monday, 10/06/13 - Friday, 14/06/13
Monday, 17/06/13 - Friday, 21/06/13
Monday, 24/06/13 - Friday, 28/06/13
Saturday, 29/06/13 - Sunday, 08/09/13
COURSES OFFERED DURING THE INTER-ACADEMIC SESSION BREAK (KSCP)
43 - 45
46 - 47
3 weeks
2 weeks
48
49-52
1 week
4 weeks
Break
Duration of
Teaching
Examinations
Break
Saturday, 29/06/13 - Sunday, 21/07/13
Monday. 22/07/13 – Friday, 02/08/13
Monday, 05/08/13 – Friday, 09/08/13
Saturday, 10/8/13 – Sunday, 08/09/13
USM Vision
Transforming Higher Education for a Sustainable Tomorrow
USM Mission
USM is a pioneering, transdisciplinary research intensive university
that empowers future talent and enables the bottom billions
to transform their socio-economic well being
i
STUDENT'S PERSONAL INFORMATION
Full Name
Identity Card (IC)/Passport No.
Current Address
Permanent Address
E-mail Address
Telephone No. (Residence)
Mobile Phone No. (if applicable)
School
Programme of Study
ii
CONTENT
PAGE
I.
II.
III.
IV.
VISION AND MISSION………………………………………………………
STUDENT’S PERSONAL INFORMATION…………………………………
CONTENT …………………………………………………………………….
ACADEMIC CALENDAR ……………………………………………………
i
ii
iii
v
1.0
INTRODUCTION
1.1 History and Development ………………………………………………
1.2 Philosophy and Objectives ……………………………………………..
1.3 Outcome Based Education ……………………………………………..
1.4 Continuous Quality Improvement System ……………………………..
1.5 External Examiners …………………………………………………….
1.6 Industry Advisory Board ……………………………………………….
1.7 Division Industry and Community Network............................................
1.8 Stakeholder …………………………………………………………….
1.9 Teaching Delivery Method …………………………………………….
1.10 Course Code………………………………………………………........
1.11 Program Structure ……………………………………………..............
1.12 Course Offering ………………………………………………….........
1
3
3
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
7
8
ACADEMIC SYSTEM AND GENERAL INFORMATION
2.1 Course Registration .............…………………………………………..
2.2 Interpretation of Unit/Credit …………………………………………...
2.3 Examination System ……………………………………………………
2.4 Unit Exemption/Credit Transfer ………………………………………..
2.5 Academic Integrity………………………………………………………
2.6 USM Mentor Programme ……………………………………………….
2.7 Student Exchange Programme …………………………………………..
11
18
18
23
27
32
33
2.0
3.0
UNIVERSITY REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Summary of University Requirements …………………………………… 34
3.2 Bahasa Malaysia ………………………………………………………… 34
3.3 English Language ……………………………………………………….. 36
3.4 Local Students - Islamic and Asian Civilisation/Ethnic Relations/
Core Entrepreneurship ………………………………………………….. 38
3.5 International Students - Malaysian Studies/Option …………………….. 39
3.6 Third Language/Co-Curriculum/Skill Courses/Options………………… 40
iii
4.0
SCHOOL OF MATERIALS AND MINERAL RESOURCES
ENGINEERING
4.1 Introduction ……………………………………………………………
4.2 Objective and Philosophy ……………………………………………..
4.3 Main Administrative Staffs……………………………………………
4.4 List of Academic Staffs……………………………………………….
4.5 External Examiners …………………………………….......................
4.6 Industry Advisory Panel……………………………………………....
4.7 Laboratory Facilities………………………………….........................
4.8 Job Opportunities…………………………………………………….
4.9 Postgraduate Studies & Research……………………………………
45
46
47
49
51
51
53
54
54
4.10 Programme for Bachelor of Engineering (Material Engineering)
Programme Objectives …………………………………..
Programme Outcomes …………………………………...
4.10.1
Curriculum Structure …………………………………….
4.10.2
Curriculum ……………………………………………….
4.10.3
Course-Programme Outcome Matrix …………………….
4.10.4
Course Description ……………………………………….
56
56
57
58
62
64
4.11 Programme for Bachelor of Engineering (Mineral Resources
Engineering)
Programme Objectives …………………………………..
Programme Outcomes …………………………………...
4.11.1
Curriculum Structure …………………………………….
4.11.2
Curriculum ……………………………………………….
4.11.3
Course-Programme Outcome Matrix …………………….
4.11.4
Course Description ……………………………………….
104
104
105
106
110
112
4.12 Programme for Bachelor of Engineering (Polymer Engineering)
Programme Objectives …………………………………..
Programme Outcomes …………………………………...
4.12.1
Curriculum Structure …………………………………….
4.12.2
Curriculum ……………………………………………….
4.12.3
Course-Programme Outcome Matrix …………………….
4.12.4
Course Description ……………………………………….
146
146
147
148
152
154
Index …………………………………………………………………………… .........194
Students’ Feedback ……………………………………………………………………197
iv
ACADEMIC CALENDAR 2012/2013 SESSION
[ 10 SEPTEMBER 2012 – 8 SEPTEMBER 2013 (52 WEEKS ]
FOR ALL PROGRAMMES [EXCEPT IN THE MEDICAL AND DENTAL SCIENCES PROGRAMMES ]
•
New Student Registration = 1 – September 2012
•
Orientation Week = 3-9 September 2012
WEEK
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 - 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43-52
SEMESTER
SEMESTER I
ACTIVITY
DATE
Monday, 10/09/12 - Friday, 14/09/12
Monday, 17/09/12 - Friday, 21/09/12
Monday, 24/09/12 - Friday, 28/09/12
Monday, 01/10/12 - Friday, 05/10/12
Monday, 08/10/12 - Friday, 12/10/12
Monday, 15/10/12 - Friday, 19/10/12
Monday, 22/10/12 - Friday, 26/10/12
Monday, 29/10/12 - Friday, 24/11/12
Monday, 05/11/12 – Friday, 09/11/12
Saturday, 10/11/12 - Sunday,18/11/12
Monday, 19/11/12 – Friday, 23/11/12
Monday, 26/11/12 - Friday, 30/11/12
Monday, 03/12/12 - Friday, 07/12/12
Monday, 10/12/12 - Friday, 14/12/12
Monday, 17/12/12 – Friday, 21/12/12
Saturday, 22/12/12 – Tuesday,01/01/13
Wednesday, 02/01/13 - Saturday,05/01/13
Monday, 07/01/13 - Saturday, 12/01/13
Monday, 14/01/13 - Friday, 18/01/13
Saturday, 19/01/13 - Sunday, 17/02/13
Monday, 18/02/13 - Friday, 22/02/13
Monday, 25/02/13 - Friday, 01/03/13
Monday, 04/03/13 - Friday, 08/03/13
Monday, 11/03/13 - Friday, 15/03/13
Monday, 18/03/13 - Friday, 22/03/13
Monday, 25/03/13 – Friday, 29/03/13
Monday, 01/04/13 – Friday, 05/04/13
Saturday, 06/04/13 - Sunday, 14/04/12
Monday,15/04/13 - Friday 19/04/13
Monday, 22/04/13 - Friday, 26/04/13
Monday, 29/04/13 - Friday, 03/05/13
Monday, 06/05/13 - Friday, 10/05/13
Monday, 13/05/13 - Friday, 17/05/13
Monday, 20/05/13 - Friday, 24/05/13
Monday, 27/05/13 - Friday, 31/05/13
Saturday, 01/06/13 - Sunday, 09/06/13
Monday, 10/06/13 - Friday, 14/06/13
Monday, 17/06/13 - Friday, 21/06/13
Monday, 24/06/13 - Friday, 28/06/13
Duration of
Teaching and
Learning
Mid Semester Break
SEMESTER I
Duration of
Teaching and
Learning
Revision Week
Examinations
INTER-SEMESTER BREAK I & II
SEMESTER II
Duration of
Teaching and
Learning
Mid Semester Break
SEMESTER II
Duration of
Teaching and
Learning
Revision Week
Examinations
Inter-Academic Session Break/
Industrial Training/ KSCP
Saturday, 29/06/13 - Sunday, 08/09/13
v
COURSES OFFERED DURING THE INTER-ACADEMIC SESSION BREAK
(KSCP)
43 - 45
46 - 47
3 weeks
2 weeks
48
49-52
1 week
4 weeks
Break
Duration of
Teaching
Examinations
Break
Saturday, 29/06/13 - Sunday, 21/07/13
Monday. 22/07/13 – Friday,02/08/13
Monday, 05/08/13 – Friday, 09/08/13
Saturday, 10/8/13 – Sunday, 08/09/13
vi
1.0
INTRODUCTION
This Engineering Handbook is specially prepared for the undergraduate engineering
students of Universiti Sains Malaysia who will commence their first year studies in the
academic year of 2012/2013.This handbook contains concise information that will prove
useful in helping students to understand the university’s system of study as well as to
adopt oneself to university life.
Information in this handbook covers various aspects such as the programme structure of
the Bachelor of Engineering degree, the academic system, types of courses, synopsis of
the courses, student status, examination and evaluation system, information about the
engineering schools, reference materials and academic staff list. This information would
give a clear picture to the students for them to plan their academic studies, understand the
field of studies that they are following and adapt themselves to the teaching and learning
environment of the university.
Universiti Sains Malaysia offers Bachelor of Engineering (with Honours) programmes
through its six schools of engineering:






1.1
School of Aerospace Engineering
School of Chemical Engineering
School of Civil Engineering
School of Electrical and Electronic Engineering
School of Materials and Mineral Resources Engineering
School of Mechanical Engineering
History and Development
In 1972, Universiti Sains Malaysia established the School of Applied Science at the Main
Campus in Penang and offered basic fields of engineering studies. The fields of studies
offered at the time were Electronic Technology, Polymer Technology, Food Technology,
Materials Technology and Mineral Resources Technology.
In 1984, the School of Applied Science was restructured and given a new name, the
School of Engineering Science and Industrial Technology. This restructuring, which
corresponded to the development of Malaysia’s Industrial Masterplan that is in turn
related to the country’s human utilization needs, gave birth to three new schools. They
were the School of Industrial Technology which focused on offering studies in fields
such as polymer and food technologies, the School of Electrical and Electronics
Engineering and the School of Materials and Mineral Resources Engineering.
The expansion that took place required an increase in the physical space of the campus.
Since the physical area of USM in Penang at the time was rather limited, a new area in
the state of Perak was identified as the site for the development of a branch campus.
1
A decision was reached whereby all fields of engineering studies were transferred to
Perak while the School of Industrial Technology remained in Penang. In 1986, the
School of Electrical and Electronics Engineering and the School of Materials and Mineral
Resources Engineering moved to a temporary campus at the old Ipoh Town Council
building while waiting for the construction of the USM branch campus in Bandar Baru
Seri Iskandar, Perak Tengah District, Perak to be completed. The temporary campus was
named USM Perak Branch Campus (USMKCP – USM Kampus Cawangan Perak).
In 1987, construction began at the site of USM Perak Branch Campus in Bandar Baru
Seri Iskandar. On 1st January 1989, the scope of engineering studies was expanded
further with the establishment of two new schools of engineering: the School of Civil
Engineering and the School of Mechanical Engineering.
By the end of November 1989, all four USM engineering schools began moving to USM
Perak Branch Campus in Seri Iskandar in stages and the moving process finally ended in
April 1990. The Ipoh Town Council building which housed USM’s temporary campus
was handed back to the Town Council in a glorious ceremony that was graced by the
DYMM Seri Paduka Baginda Yang Dipertuan Agong, Sultan Azlan Shah.
In 1992, USM established its fifth engineering school, the School of Chemical
Engineering. Two years later, efforts to offer studies in the field of Aerospace
Engineering went underway. On 17th of May 1998, the USM Aerospace Engineering
Unit was established and on the 1st of March 1999 the unit was upgraded to the School of
Aerospace Engineering.
In 1997, the government decided to transfer USMKCP back to Penang. The new campus
site was located in Seri Ampangan, Nibong Tebal, Seberang Perai Selatan, Penang while
USMKCP’s campus site in Seri Iskandar was taken over by the Universiti Teknologi
Petronas (UTP).
The Engineering Campus moved in stages in 2001. USM’s Engineering Campus in Seri
Ampangan, Nibong Tebal began its operations in the 2001/2002 Academic Session in
June 2001.
In 2007, USM was appointed as one of the four research universities by the Ministry of
Higher Education [MoHE] through a rigorous evaluation process thus elevating its status
to the top among more than 100 public and private universities and colleges in Malaysia.
In the same year, USM was rated as the only “excellent” (or 5-Star) university in the
Academic Reputation Survey conducted by the Malaysian Qualification Agency (MQA).
On 4th of September 2008, USM was granted with an APEX (the Accelerated Programme
for Excellence) status by the Malaysian’s government. This status requires USM to
transform its system in order to move up its World University Rankings with a target of
top 100 in five years and top 50 by 2020.
USM's transformation plan, entitled “Transforming Higher Education for a Sustainable
Tomorrow” will embark on numerous transformational journeys, including revamping
2
most of its activities pertaining to nurturing and learning, research and innovation,
services, students and alumni and the management of the university as a whole.
The University takes steps to improve the three core pillars of its strengths, [i]
concentration of talent, [ii] resources and [iii] acculturation of supportive governance.
1.2 Philosophy and Objective
The philosophy and objective of the Bachelor of Engineering programme at the
Universiti Sains Malaysia is to produce qualified engineering graduates in various fields
who are able to find solutions to diverse problems through innovative thinking.
The engineering programme at USM aims to produce professional engineers who are
responsible towards research and development, project management, production planning
and control and accreditation of equipments in various fields in the country.
Thus all courses that are being offered in the engineering programme blend together the
theoretical and practical aspects of learning according to the relevant needs of the
industrial public sectors. The fields of engineering studies in USM are up to date and
challenging so as to fulfil the nation’s industrial development needs. Students will also
be equipped with fundamentals of business practice such as finance, marketing and
management as well as co-curricular activities so that the students could adapt themselves
well to the current state of affairs.
1.3 Outcome Based Education
All bachelor engineering programmes at the Universiti Sains Malaysia have adopted the
Outcome Based Education (OBE) since the academic year of 2006/2007. The OBE
emphasises that the professional attributes of the graduates satisfy the current and future
needs of the country and global market in general. For this, the programme educational
objectives of each programme offered at the Engineering Schools are developed through
interviews and surveys from the stakeholders including industries, government, parents,
students, alumni and the university lecturers. This signifies that the programmes offered
in USM are relevance to the current need of industries and society and for the preparation
of high quality future talents.
With the agreed programme educational objectives, the curricular structure of each
programme is planned accordingly to ensure that our graduate possess the quality
attributes as suggested by the Engineering Accreditation Council (EAC) and Board of
Engineer Malaysia (BEM) are achieved. The attributes are:
• ability to acquire and apply knowledge of science and engineering fundamentals,
• acquired in‐depth technical competence in a specific engineering discipline,
• ability to undertake problem identification, formulation and solution,
• ability to utilise systems approach to design and evaluate operational performance,
• understanding of the principles of design for sustainable development,
• understanding of professional and ethical responsibilities and commitment to them,
3
• ability to communicate effectively, not only with engineers but also with the
community at large,
• ability to function effectively as an individual and in a group with the capacity to be
a leader or manager,
• understanding of the social, cultural, global and environmental responsibilities of a
professional engineer, and
• recognising the need to undertake lifelong learning, and possessing/acquiring the
capacity to do so.
1.4 Continuous Quality Improvement System
To realize the Outcome Based Education, a few mechanisms have been identified to be
incorporated into the continuous quality improvement system for the Bachelor of
Engineering programmes. Feedbacks are obtained from industries through the Industrial
Advisory Panel which consist of at least five engineers or managers from industrial
sectors.
Feedbacks from the students are obtained from the Lecturer-Student Committee and
Interview Session with each student before their convocation. Feedbacks from the
alumni are obtained from the USM Alumni Relations Unit and the School’s alumni
communities such as email, webpage and Facebook. All these feedbacks are
incorporated for deliberations and approval by the Curriculum Review Committee which
convenes annually to identify any particular course or programme that need to be
revamped or to undergo minor/major changes.
1.5 External Examiner
Universiti Sains Malaysia has appointed external examiners to:
• Advice the School/Centre concerned regarding matters pertaining to the
structure and contents of its undergraduate programmes, research and
administration related to examinations. Attention is also focused towards postgraduate programmes where applicable.
•
Scrutinise and evaluate all draft question papers prepared by Internal Examiners.
•
Visit the university during the period of the examinations in order to be familiar
with the work of the School/Centre, the available physical facilities and also to
participate in activities related directly to the conduct of the examinations. In
order to make the visit more meaningful and to obtain a better understanding of
the University, an External Examiner who has been appointed for a term of three
academic sessions should visit the school/centre during the first academic
session of his appointment.
•
Scrutinise and evaluate such answer scripts as may be required by the
Dean/Director of the School/Centre concerned and to ensure that the standards
set by Internal Examiners (of the discipline to which he/she is appointed) are the
same as those at other Universities of International standing.
4
•
•
•
Ensure uniformity in the evaluation of answer scripts by the Internal Examiners
between candidates of the same standard.
Examine the oral component or viva-voce where required.
Hold seminars/meetings with the academic staffs/students if required.
1.6 Industry Advisory Board
The engineering schools have set up an Industrial Advisory Board for all offered
engineering programmes and various meetings have and will be conducted from time to
time. Each school has appointed prominent members from the industry and relevant
institutions to be in the Advisory Board. The Industrial Advisory Board members will
discuss and give their input on the Industrial Training; Outcome Based Education (OBE)
implementation, curriculum development, the requirement of soft skills and other
relevant issues to the School to improve the quality of programmes and graduates.
1.7 Division of Industry and Community Network
To foster closer, effective, meaningful and sustainable linkages and partnership with the
industry and the community, i.e. the world outside Universiti Sains Malaysia, a new
division, the Division of Industry & Community Network was established within the
Chancellery in September 2007. This new division is headed by a Deputy Vice
Chancellor (Industry and Community Network). The function of this division is to match
between the knowledge/expertise, facilities and resources of the university to the needs,
aspirations and expectations of the industry and the community to result in a win-win
situation.
1.8 Stakeholder
In line with the Engineering Accreditation Council (EAC) requirements for involvement
of stakeholders in establishing the programme educational objectives, their inputs have
been continuously gathered from surveys and direct communications. The University has
identified the stakeholders as follows:
• Academic Staffs (University)
• Employers (industry and government)
• Alumni
• Students
• Parents
1.9 Teaching Delivery Method
Other contributing components to the curriculum such as a variety of teaching and
learning (delivery) modes, assessment and evaluation methods are designed, planned and
incorporated within the curriculum to enable students to effectively develop the range of
intellectual and practical skills, as well as positive attitudes. The assessments to evaluate
the degree of the achievement of the Programme Outcomes by the students are done both
at the programme as well as at course levels. The teaching and learning methods
designed enable students to take full responsibility for their own learning and prepare
themselves for lifelong learning and knowledge acquisition.
5
1.10 Course Code
Each course offered by the respective School is denoted by the following code of ABC
123/4. The alphabets and numbers represent:A
B
C
1
2
3/4
Course Unit Value
Course Serial Number
Course Level
1 = Level 100
2 = Level 200
3 = Level 300
4 = Level 400
Course Specialization
A = Aerospace Engineering/
Civil Eng. Design and Laboratory
B = Materials Engineering
C = Chemical Engineering
D = Designs
E = Electronics
P = Mechanical Engineering (Manufacturing)/
Geotechnical Engineering (Civil)
H = Hydraulics and Hydrological Engineering
M, H = Mechanical Engineering
L = Highway and Traffic Engineering/
Laboratory
M =Mechatronic Engineering/Mathematics
P = Polymer Engineering/Water Supply and
Environmental Engineering
S = Mineral Resources Engineering/Structure
Engineering (Civil)
T = Power Electric
U = General
X =Independent Studies
School
A = School of Civil Engineering
B = School of Materials & Mineral
Resources Engineering
E = School of Electrical & Electronics
Engineering
K = School of Chemical Engineering
M = School of Mechanical Engineering
(Mechanical Programme)
P = School of Mechanical Engineering
(Manufacturing Programme)
S = School of Aerospace Engineering
U = General Courses
E = Engineering
6
1.11 Programme Structure
The Structure of the Engineering Degree Programme is as follows:-
______________________________________________________________________
Course
Units
Remarks
________________________________________________________________________
(i) CORE
108
(ii) ELECTIVE
12
(iii) UNIVERSITY REQUIREMENTS
Compulsory (12 units)
(a) Bahasa Malaysia
(b) English Language
(c) Islamic and Asian Civilisations
(d) Ethnic Relations
(e) Entrepreneurship
15
Optional Course (3 Units)
(a) Co-curriculum/Optional/
Skills
TOTAL:
Students may select these courses
from the list as determined by the
respective school.
2
4
2
2
2
3
----------135
-----------
Note:
For graduation, students are required to complete at least 135 units, with ‘pass’ grade for
all the courses.
7
1.12 Courses Offering
Students are required to register for the undergraduate courses in two semesters for each
academic session that is Semester 1 and Semester 2. Courses are offered and examined
in the same semester. Courses offered are categorized into four levels, via levels 100,
200, 300 and 400, suitable to the requirements of a four-year study programme.
Core Courses
Core course is a compulsory course package which aims at giving a deeper understanding
of an area of specialization / major. Students need to accumulate 108 units of the core
courses which have been identified by each school.
Elective Courses
Students who do not choose a Minor area are required to take Elective courses. Students
need to accumulate no less than 12 units from the list of courses suggested and
acknowledged by the school.
Optional Courses
Optional courses are courses chosen by the students from among those that are outside of
their programmes of study.
The main objective of an Optional course is as a substitute course for students who do not
take Co-curriculum courses or Skill/Analysis courses.
Audit Courses
In principle, the university allows students to register for any courses on an audit basis for
the purpose of enhancing the students’ knowledge in specific fields during the duration of
their study. However, the units of any such audit courses will not be taken into
consideration for graduation purposes.
The registration procedures for courses on an audit basis are as follows:(a)
Students can register for courses on an audit basis for the purpose of augmenting
his/her knowledge in specific fields. Registration for the said course must be within
the course registration week.
(b)
Only students of active status are allowed to register for courses on an audit basis.
8
(c)
Courses registered for on an audit basis are designated as code ‘Y’ courses. This
designation will be indicated on the relevant academic transcript. A space at the
bottom of the academic transcript will be reserved for listing the courses registered
for on an audit basis.
(d)
Courses registered for on an audit basis will not be taken into consideration in
determining the minimum and maximum units of courses registered for.
(e)
Students must fulfil all course requirements. Student who register for courses on an
audit basis, are not obligated to sit for any examinations pertaining to that course. A
grade ‘R’ will be awarded irrespective as to whether the student had or had not sat
for the examination.
Laboratory Work/Practical, Engineering Practice and Industrial Training
Programmes in the School of Engineering place a great emphasis on laboratory
work/practical. Laboratory work/practical is an important and essential aspect in most
courses. There are also courses that the assessment is based on 100% works in laboratory
work/practical. It aims to provide students with a better understanding of the subject
matter delivered through lectures.
Students are required to submit laboratory/practical reports which are part of the course
work assessment for courses delivered through lectures and the laboratory/practical
component only. Attendance is compulsory for all levels of study and students may be
barred from taking the written examination if their attendance is unsatisfactory.
Apart from attending classes (lectures and laboratory/practical), students must also
undergo the Engineering Practice Course and Industrial Training.
General Objectives of Engineering Practice
(a) To expose to the students about the importance and the link between the theoretical
and practical aspects of engineering, and to familiarise them with the
environment/theoretical situations in use, available resources and their scarcity so
that the academic aspects of a course can be understood better and used more
effectively.
(b) To raise awareness of the environment/industrial situations, practices, resources and
their scarcity. Therefore, students will have the opportunity to equip themselves to
face future challenges in their academic studies as well as in their future training.
The Engineering Practice will be conducted in the following manner:
The training will be conducted on and off campus. There are two levels which are
compulsory for all engineering students:
9
(i) Engineering Practice Course
The Engineering Practice Course is a basic training course on mechanical, manufacturing
and electrical engineering. The training includes engineering workshops, introduction to
manufacturing processes and electrical circuit. Engineering students will also be exposed
to methods of engineering planning and project implementation. The duration of the
training is 14 weeks and during this period, students will be supervised by the academic
staff on duty.
(ii) Industrial Training
This course is conducted over 10 weeks during the long break after Semester II at level
300. Students are exposed to the actual operations of industries, locally and abroad. It is
hoped that students will be able to learn and experience useful knowledge and skills
while undergoing training as they have already taken the Engineering Practice Course.
It is hoped that the training will provide students with a good foundation in engineering.
This is a 5-unit course and students will be awarded a Pass/Fail grade upon completion.
10
2.0
ACADEMIC SYSTEM AND GENERAL INFORMATION
2.1 Course Registration
Registration is an important activity during the period of study at the University. It is
the first step for the students to sit for the examination at the end of each semester.
Sign up for the right courses each semester will help to facilitate the graduation of
each student from the first semester till the final semester.
2.1.1
Course Registration Secretariat for the Bachelor Degree and
University’s Diploma Student
Student Data & Records Section (SDRP)
Academic Management Division
Registry
(Level 1, Chancellor Building)
Tel. No.
Fax No.
Website
:
:
:
04-6532925/3169/4195
04-6574641
registry.usm.my/updr/
SDRP office is the secretariat / manager / coordinator of course registration
for the Bachelor Degree and Diploma of the University.
Further enquiries about course registration activities for the first degree and
diploma can be made at any time at the office of the Student Data &
Records Section.
2.1.2
Course Registration Platform
i)
E-Daftar (E-Registration)
E-Daftar is a platform for course registration through website. The
registration is done directly through Campus Online portal
(campusonline.usm.my). Only students with active account are allowed
to register for courses in the E-Daftar.
Registration under E-Daftar for Semester 1 usually starts 1-2 days after
the release of 'Official' examination result of the Semester 2 from the
previous academic year. The system closes a day before Semester 1
begins (usually in September). E-Daftar registration for Semester 2
usually starts 1-2 days after Semester 1 ‘Provisional’ examination result
is released until a day before Semester 2 begins (normally in February).
The actual timing of registration under E-Daftar will be announced by
the Student Data & Records Section usually during the Revision Week
of every semester and will be displayed on the schools/centres/hostels’
bulletin board and in the USM’s official website.
11
Under E-Daftar, students can register any courses offered by USM,
except co-curriculum courses. Registration of Co-curriculum courses is
still placed under the administration of the Director of the Centre for
Co-Curriculum Programme at the Main Campus or the Coordinator of
the Co-Curriculum Programme at the Engineering Campus and the
Coordinator of the Co-Curriculum Programme at the Health Campus.
Co-Curriculum courses will be included in the students’ course
registration account prior to the E-Daftar activity, if their preregistration application successful.
ii) Access to E-Daftar System
a)
E-Daftar System can be accessed through Campus Online portal
(campusonline.usm.my).
b) Students need to register in this portal to be a member. Each
member will be given an ID and password.
c) Students need to use the ID and password to access to their profile
page, which includes the E-Daftar menu.
d) Students need to click at the E-Daftar menu to access and register
for the relevant courses.
e) Students are advised to print the course registration confirmation
slip upon completion of the registration process or after updating
the course registration list (add/drop) within the E-Daftar period.
f) E-Daftar system can only be accessed for a certain period of time.
g) Guidelines to register/access to E-Daftar portal are available at the
Campus Online portal’s main page.
iii) Online Course Registration (OCR)
OCR activities are conducted in the Schools/Centres and are applicable
to students who are academically active and under Probation (P1/P2)
status. Students, who face difficulties to register their courses in the EDaftar can register their courses during the official period of OCR
alternatively. Each school is responsible for scheduling this activity.
Students must refer to the schedule at the notice board of their
respective schools.
Official period for OCR normally starts on the first day of the semester
(without the penalty charge of RM50.00). After this official period, the
registration will be considered late. (The penalty of RM50.00 will be
imposed if no reasonable excuse is given.) During the non-penalty
period, OCR will be conducted at each school. After Week Six, all
registration, including adding and dropping courses will be
administered by the Examination & Graduation Section Office
(Academic Management Division, Registry).
12
2.1.3
The Frequency of Course Registration in One Academic Session
i)
Normal Study Semester
- 2 times per year (beginning of Semester 1 & Semester 2)
ii) Long semester break (about one month after the final examination
of Semester 2)
- Once per year
- Applicable for relevant students only.
2.1.4
General Guidelines Before Students Register for Courses
i) Matters / Information / Documents Required to be noted / considered /
referred by students before course registration:
- Refer to the respective school’s website to get updated information
for courses offered or course registration.
- Decide courses to be registered according to the semester as
stipulated in the Study Program Guide Book.
- List courses to be registered and number of units (unit value) for each
course.
- Provide Cumulative Statement of Grades (Cangred).
- Construct Teaching and Learning Timetable for the registered courses
(to avoid overlapping in timetable).
- Read and comprehend the reminders regarding policies/general
requirements for the course registration.
ii) The number of maximum and minimum units that can be registered in
every semester are stated as below:
Academic Status
Active
P1
P2
-
-
Minimum Unit
9
9
9
Maximum Unit
21
12
10
Determination for an academic status in a semester is based on the
academic performance of the students in the previous semester
(Grade Point Average, GPA):o GPA 2.00 & above = Active Academic Status
o GPA 1.99 & below = Probation Academic Status (P1/P2)
Students who meet the minimum period of residency (6 semesters
for 3 years programme, 7 semesters for 3.5 years programme or 8
semesters for 4 years programme) are allowed to register courses
with total units below 9. The semester in which the student is on
leave is not considered for the residency period.
13
iii) Type of course codes during registration:T
E
M
U
=
=
=
=
Core courses
Elective courses
Minor courses
University courses
Two (2) other course codes are:Y
= audit courses
Z
= prerequisite courses
Grade and number of units
obtain from these courses
are considered for graduation
Grade and number of units
obtain from these cources are not
considered for graduation
iv) Advice and approval of the Academic Advisor.
- Approval from the Academic Advisor is required for the students
under Probation status before being allowed to register during the
OCR period. Probation students cannot assess E-Daftar for
registration.
- Approval from the Academic Advisor is not required for the students
under Active Status to register courses through E-Daftar.
v) Students are not allowed to register and to repeat any course that has
achieved a grade 'C' and above.
2.1.5
Information/Document Given To All Students Through Campus
Online Portal (www.campusonline.com.my)
i) The information of Academic Advisor.
ii) Academic information such as academic status, GPA value, CGPA
value and year of study.
iii) Cangred and Course Registration Form.
iv) List of courses offered from all schools/centres.
v) Teaching and Learning Timetable for all schools/centres/units from the
three campuses.
vi) List of pre-registered courses which have been added into the students’
course registration record (if any).
vii) Reminders about the University course registration policies/general
requisites.
2.1.6
Registration of Language and Co-Curriculum Courses
a) Registration for Language courses through E-Daftar is allowed.
•
However, if any problem occurs, registration for language courses can still be
carried out / updated during the official period of OCR at the office of the
School of Language, Literacies & Translation.
14
•
All approval / registration / dropping / adding of the language courses are under
the responsibility and administration of the School of Language, Literacies &
Translation.
•
Any problems related to the registration of language courses can be made to the
School of Language, Literacies & Translation. The contact details are as follow:
General Office
: 04-6534542
for Main
Malay Language Programme Chairperson : 04-6533974
Campus
English Language Programme Chairperson : 04-6533406
students
Foreign Language Programme Chairperson : 04-6533396
Engineering Campus Programme Chairperson
Health Campus Programme Chairperson
b)
: 04-5995407
: 09-7671252
Registration for Co-Curriculum courses through E-Daftar is not allowed.
•
Registration for Co-Curriculum courses is either done through pre-registration
before the semester begins or during the first/second week of the semester. CoCurriculum courses will be included in the students’ course registration account
prior to the E-Daftar activity, if their pre-registration application successful.
•
All approval / registration / dropping / adding of the Co-Curriculum courses are
under the responsibility and administration of the Director of the Centre for CoCurriculum Programme for Main Campus (04-6535243/45/48), Coordinator of
the Co-Curriculum Programme for Engineering Campus (04-5995091),
Coordinator of the Co-Curriculum Programme for Health Campus (097677547).
c)
2.1.7
Dropping of Language and Co-Curriculum courses, if necessary, must be
made within the first week. After the first week, a fine of RM50.00 will be
charged.
Registration of ‘Audit’ Course (Y code)
Registration for the ‘Audit’ course (Y code) is not allowed in the EDaftar. It can only be made during the official period of OCR in the School
or Centre involved. Students who are interested must complete the course
registration form which can be printed from the Campus Online Portal or
obtained it directly from the School. Approval from the lecturers of the
course to be audited and the Dean / Deputy Dean (Academic) [signed and
stamped] in the course registration form are required.
Registration on ‘Audit’ courses (Y code) is not included in the calculation
of the total registered workload units. Grades obtained from ‘Audit’ course
are not considered in the calculation of CGPA and total units for graduation.
2.1.8
Registration of Prerequisite Course (Z code)
15
Registration of the Prerequisite courses (Z code) is included in the total
registered workload (unit). Grades obtained from the Prerequisite courses
are not considered in the calculation of CGPA and units for graduation.
2.1.9
Late Course Registration / Late Course Addition
Late course registration or addition is not allowed after the official period of
the OCR ends without any reasonable excuses. General information on this
matter is as follows:
i)
Late course registration and addition are only allowed in the first to
the third week with the approval of the Dean. Students will be fined
RM50.00 if the reasons given are not reasonable.
ii) Application to add a course after the third week will not be
considered, except for the special cases approved by the University.
2.1.10
Dropping Courses
Dropping the course is allowed until the end of the sixth week.
For this purpose, students must meet the requirements set by the University
as follows: i) Dropping Course Form must be completed by the student and signed
by the lecturer of the course involved and the Dean / Deputy Dean of
their respective schools and submit it to the general office of the
School/Centre which is responsible of offering the courses involved.
ii) Students who wish to drop a language course must obtain the signature
and stamp of the Dean of the School of Language, Literacies and
Translation, as well as the signature and stamp of the Dean of their
respective schools.
iii) Students who wish to drop the Co-Curriculum courses must obtain the
approval of the Centre for Co-Curriculum Programme and the signature
and stamp of the Dean of their respective schools.
iv) The option for dropping courses cannot be misused. Lecturers have the
right not to certify the course that the student wish to drop if the student
is not serious, such as the record of attendance at lectures, tutorials and
practical is unsatisfactory, as well as poor performance in course work.
The student will be denied to sit for the examination and will be given
grade 'X' and is not allowed to repeat the course during the period of
Courses during the Long Vacation (KSCP).
2.1.11
Course Registration Confirmation Slip
Course registration confirmation slip that has been printed / obtained after
registering the course should be checked carefully to ensure no errors,
especially the code type of the registered course codes. Any data errors for
16
course registration must be corrected immediately whether during the
period of E-Daftar (for student with active status only) or during the period
of OCR at the Schools.
2.1.12
Revising and Updating Data / Information / Students Personal and
Academic Records
Personal and academic information for each student can be checked through
the Campus Online portal (campusonline.usm.my).
Students are advised to always check all the information displayed on this
website.
2.1.13
-
Any application / notification for correction / updating of personal data
such as the spelling of names (names must be spelled as shown on the
Identification Card), Identification Card number and address
(permanent address and correspondence address) must be notified to
the office of the Student Data & Records Section.
-
Any application / notification for correction of academic data such as
information on Major, Minor, MUET result and the course code should
be reported to the office of the Student Data & Records Section.
-
Application / notification for correction of the examination/results data
should be reported to the office of the Examination and Graduation
Section.
Academic Advisor
Each School will appoint an Academic Advisor for each student. Academic
Advisors are comprised of academic staff (lecturers). Normally,
confirmation from Academic Advisors will be made known to every student
during the first semester in the first year of their studies.
Academic Advisors will advice the students under their responsibility on
the academic-related matters. Among the important advice for the student is
the registration planning for certain courses in each semester during the
study period. Before registering the course, students are advised to consult
and discuss with their Academic Advisor to determine the courses to be
registered in a semester.
Final year students are advised to consult their respective academic advisors
before registering via E-Daftar to ensure they fulfil the graduation
requirements. Students under the Probation status (P1/P2) should obtain the
approval from the Academic Advisor before they register for courses in a
semester through OCR at the School and they are not allowed to register
through E-Daftar.
17
2.2 Interpretation of Unit/Credit
a)
Unit
Each course is given a value, which is called a UNIT. The unit is determined by
the scope of its syllabus and the workload for the students. In general, a unit is
defined as follows:
Type of Course
Definition of Unit
Theory
1 unit is equivalent to 1 contact hour per
week for 13 - 14 weeks in one semester.
Practical/Laboratory
1 unit is equivalent to 1.5 contact hours per
week for 13 - 14 hours in one semester
Language Proficiency
1 unit is equivalent to 1.5 contact hours per
week for 13 - 14 weeks in one semester.
Industrial Training/ Teaching
Practice
1 unit is equivalent to 2 weeks of training.
b) Contact
Contact is defined as formal face-to-face meeting between an academic staff and
his/her students and it may take the form of lectures, tutorials, seminar,
laboratory and field work.
c)
Accumulated Credit Unit
Units registered and passed are known as credits. To graduate, students must
accumulate the total number of credits stipulated for the program concerned.
2.3 Examination System
Examination would be held at the end of every semester. Students have to sit for
the examination of the courses they have registered. Students are required to
settle all due fees and fulfil the standing requirements for
lectures/tutorials/practical and other requirements before being allowed to sit for
the examination of courses they registered. Course evaluation will be based on
the two components of coursework and final examinations. Coursework
evaluation includes tests, essays, projects, assignments and participation in
tutorials.
18
Duration of Examination
Examination Duration
Evaluated Courses
2 units
1 hour for coursework of more than 40%
2 units
2 hours for coursework of 40% and below
3 units or more
2 hours for coursework of more than 40%
3 units or more
3 hours for coursework of 40% and below
Barring from Examination
Students will be barred from sitting the final examination if they do not satisfy
the course requirements, such as absence from lectures and tutorials for at least
70%, and have not completed/fulfilled the required components of coursework.
Students will also be barred from sitting the final examination if they have not
settled the academic fees. A grade 'X' would be awarded for a course in which a
student is barred. Students will not be allowed repeating the course during Course
during the Long Vacation (KSCP).
Grade Point Average System
Student academic achievement for registered courses will be graded as follows:
Alphabetic
Grade
A
A-
B+
B
B-
C+
C
C-
D+
D
D-
F
Grade
Points
4.
00
3.67
3.33
3.00
2.67
2.33
2.00
1.67
1.33
1.00
0.67
0
Students awarded with grade 'C-' and below for a particular course would be
given a chance to improve their grades by repeating the course during the KSCP
(See below) or normal semester. Students awarded with grade 'C' and above for
a particular course will not be allowed to repeat the course whether during KSCP
or normal semester.
The achievements of students in any semester are based on Grade Point Average
(GPA) achieved from all the registered courses in a particular semester.
GPA is the indicator to determine the academic performance of students in any
semester.
CGPA is the Cumulative Grade Point Average accumulated by a student from
one semester to another during the years of study.
The formula to compute GPA and CGPA is as follows:
19
n
∑ Ui Mi
Grade Point Average = i=1
__________
n
∑ Ui
i=1
where
n = Number of courses taken
Ui = Course units for course i
Mi = Grade point for course i
Example of calculation for GPA and CGPA:
Semester I
Course
Unit
Grade Point
(GP)
Grade (G)
Total
GP
ABC XX1
4
3.00
B
12.00
ABC XX2
4
2.33
C+
9.32
BCDXX3
3
1.67
C-
5.01
CDEXX4
4
2.00
C
8.00
EFGXX5
3
1.33
D+
3.99
EFGXX6
2
2.67
B-
5.34
20
43.66
GPA = 43.66 = 2.18
20
Semester II
Course
Unit
Grade Point
(GP)
Grade (G )
Total
GP
ABCXX7
3
1.00
D
3.00
ABBXX8
4
2.33
C+
9.32
BBCXX9
4
2.00
C
8.00
BCBX10
4
2.67
B-
10.68
XYZXX1
3
3.33
B+
9.99
18
40.99
GPA = 40.99 = 2.28
18
20
43.66 + 40.99 84.65
CGPA = Total Accumulated GP
Total Accumulated Unit =
20 + 18
= 38
= 2.23
From the above examples, the CGPA is calculated as the total grade point
accumulated for all the registered courses and divided by the total number of
the registered units.
Courses During the Long Vacation (Kursus Semasa Cuti Panjang) (KSCP)
KSCP is offered to students who have taken a course earlier and obtained
a grade of 'C-', 'D+', 'D', 'D-', 'F' and 'DK' only. Students who have obtained 'X'
or 'F*' grade are not allowed to take the course during KSCP.
The purpose of KSCP is to:
i)
Give an opportunity to students who are facing time constraints for
graduation.
ii) Assist students who need to accumulate a few more credits for graduation.
iii) Assist "probationary" students to enhance their academic status.
iv) Assist students who need to repeat a prerequisite course, which is not
offered in the following semester.
However, this opportunity is only given to students who are taking courses that
they have attempted before and achieved a grade as stipulated above, provided
that the course is being offered. Priority is given to the final year students.
Usually, formal lectures are not held, and teaching is via tutorials.
The duration of KSCP is 3 weeks, i.e. 2 weeks of tutorial and 1 week of
examination, all held during the long vacation. The KSCP schedule is available in
the University's Academic Calendar.
The Implementation KSCP
a)
Students are allowed to register a maximum of 3 courses and the total
number of units registered must not exceed 10.
b) Marks/grades for coursework are taken from the highest marks/the best
grades obtained in a particular course in the normal semester before KSCP.
The final overall grade is determined as follows:
Final Grade = The best coursework marks or grade + Marks or grade
for KSCP examination
c)
GPA calculation involves the LATEST grades (obtained in KSCP) and also
involves courses taken in the second semester and those repeated in KSCP. If
the GPA during KSCP as calculated above is 2.00 or better, the academic
21
status will be active, even though the academic status for the second
semester was on probation status. However, if the GPA for KSCP (as
calculated above) is 1.99 or below, the academic status will remain as
probation status for the second semester.
d) Graduating students (those who have fulfilled the graduation requirements)
in the second semester are not allowed to register for KSCP.
Academic Status
Active Status: Any student who achieves a GPA of 2.00 and above for any
examination in a semester will be recognised as ACTIVE and be allowed to
pursue his/her studies for the following semester.
Probation Status: A probation status is given to any student who achieves a GPA
of 1.99 and below. A student who is under probation status for three
consecutive semesters (P1, P2, FO) will not be allowed to pursue his/her studies
at the university. On the other hand, if the CGPA is 2.00 and above, the student
concerned will be allowed to pursue his/her studies and will be maintained at P2
status.
Without any prejudice to the above regulations, the University Examination
Council has the absolute right to terminate any student's studies if his/her
academic achievement do not satisfy and fulfil the accumulated minimum credit
in line with the number of semesters completed by the student as given in the
table below.
Number of Semesters
Total Accumulated Minimum
Credit Units
Pure
Applied
Professional
nd
15
15
16
th
End of 4 semester
35
35
38
th
End of 6 semester
55
55
60
th
75
75
80
End of 2 semester
End of 8 semester
The University Examination Council has the right to terminate any student's
studies due to certain reasons (a student who has not registered for the courses,
has not attended examination without valid reasons), as well as medical reasons
can be disqualified from pursuing his/her studies.
Examination Result
A provisional result (pass/fail) through the Tele-academic line: (600-83-7899),
Campus Online Portal and short message service (SMS) will usually be released
22
and announced after the School Examination Council meeting and presumably
one month after final examination.
Full result (grade) can be enquired through the Tele-academic line: (600-837899), Campus Online Portal and short message service (SMS) will be released
and announced after the University Examination Council meeting and is usually
two weeks after the provisional results are released.
The official semester results (SEMGRED) will be issued to students during the
second week of the following semester.
2.4 Unit Exemption/Credit Transfer
Definition of Unit Exemption
Unit exemption is defined as the total number of units given to students who are
pursuing their studies in USM that are exempted from the graduation
requirements. Students only need to accumulate the remaining units for
graduating purpose. Only passes or course grades accumulated or acquired in
USM will be included in the calculation of the Cumulative Grade Point Average
(CGPA) for graduation purpose.
Regulations and Implementation of Unit Exemption
a) Diploma holders from recognised Public and Private Institutions of Higher
Learning:
i)
Unit exemption can only be given to courses taken at diploma level.
ii) Courses for unit exemption may be combined (in two or more
combinations) in order to obtain exemption of one course at degree
level. However if the School would like to approve only one course at
the diploma level for unit exemption of one course at degree level, the
course at diploma level must be equivalent to the degree course and has
the same or more units.
iii) Courses taken during employment (in service) for diploma holders
cannot be considered for unit exemption.
iv) The minimum achievement at diploma level that can be considered for
unit exemption is at least 'C' grade or 2.0 or equivalent.
v) The total number of semesters exempted should not exceed two
semesters.
vi) In order to obtain unit exemption for industrial training, a student must
have work experience continuously for at least two years in the area. If
23
the student has undergone industrial training during the diploma level
study, a student must have work experience for at least one year. The
students are also required to produce the report on the level and type of
work performed. Industrial training unit exemption cannot be
considered for semester exemption as the industrial training is carried
out during the long vacation in USM.
vii) Unit exemption for university and option courses can only be given for
courses such as Bahasa Malaysia (LKM400), English Language,
Islamic and Asian Civilisations and as well as co-curriculum.
b) IPTS (Private Institution of Higher Learning) USM Supervised/External
Diploma Graduates
i)
c)
Students who are IPTS USM supervised/external diploma graduates are
given unit exemption as stipulated by the specific programme of study.
Normally, unit exemption in this category is given as a block according
to the agreement between USM (through School that offers the
programme) with the IPTS.
Students from recognised local or foreign IPTA (Public Institution of
Higher Learning)/IPTS who are studying at the Bachelor Degree level may
apply to study in this university and if successful, can be considered for unit
exemptions subject to the following conditions:
i)
Courses taken in the previous IPT are equivalent (at least 50% of the
course must be the same) with courses offered in USM.
ii) Students taking courses at advanced diploma level in IPT that is
recognised to be equivalent to the Bachelor Degree course at USM may
be considered for unit exemption as in c) i).
iii) The total maximum unit exemption allowed should not exceed one
third of the total unit requirement for graduation.
Total Number of Exempted Semesters
Semester exemption is based on the total unit exempted as below:Total Unit Exempted
<9
9-32
>32
Total Semester Exempted
1
2
24
Application Procedure for Unit Exemption
Any student who would like to apply for exemption unit is required to complete
the Unit Exemption Form which can be obtained at the counter of Admission
and Enrolments Unit or the respective schools.
The form must to be approved by the Dean/Deputy Dean of the School prior to
the submission to the Admission and Enrolments Unit for consideration.
Definition of Credit Transfer
Credit transfer is defined as the recognition of a total number of credits obtained
by USM students taking courses in other IPTA (Public Institution of Higher
Learning) within the period of study at USM, and is combined with credits
obtained at USM to fulfil units requirement for his/her programme of study.
The transferred examination result or grades obtained in courses taken at other
IPTA will be combined in the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA)
calculation.
Category of Students Who Can Be Considered for Credit Transfer
USM full-time Bachelor Degree level students who would like to attend specific
Bachelor Degree level courses at other IPTA.
USM full-time diploma level students who would like to attend specific diploma
level courses at other IPTA.
Conditions
a)
Basic and Core Courses
i)
Credit transfer can only be considered for credits obtained from other
courses in other IPTA that are equivalent (at least 50% of the content
are the same) with the courses offered by the programme.
ii) Courses that can be transferred are only courses that have the same
number of units or more. For equivalent courses but with less number
of units, credit transfers can be approved by combining a few courses.
Credits transferred are the same as the course units as offered in USM.
Average grade of the combined course will be taken into account in
CGPA calculation.
b) Elective or Option Courses
i)
Students may attend any appropriate courses in other IPTA subject to
permission from the School as well as the approval of other IPTA.
25
ii) The transferred credits are credits obtained from courses at other IPTA.
No course equivalence condition is required.
c)
Minor Courses
i)
For credit transfer of minor courses, the School should adhere to either
conditions (a) or (b), and take into account of the programme
requirement.
d) The total maximum units transferred should not exceed one third of the total
number of units for the programme.
e)
Credit exemption from other IPTA can be considered only once for each
IPTA.
f)
The examination results obtained by a student taken at other IPTA will be
taken into account for graduation purpose. Grade obtained for each course
will be combined with the grades obtained at USM for CGPA calculation.
g) Students who have applied and approved for credit transfer are not allowed
to cancel the approval after the examination result is obtained.
h) Students are required to register courses at other IPTA with not less than the
total minimum units as well as not exceeding the maximum units as
stipulated in their programme of study. However, for specific cases (e.g.
students on extended semester and only require a few units for graduation),
the Dean may approve such students to register less than the minimum and
the semester will not be counted in the residential requirement. In this case,
the CGPA calculation will be carried out as in KSCP.
i)
USM students attending courses at other IPTA and if failed in any courses
are allowed to resit the examination if there is such provision in that IPTA.
j)
If the method of calculation of examination marks in the other IPTA is not
the same as in USM, a grade conversion method will be carried out
according to the existing scales.
k) USM students who have registered courses at other IPTA and decided to
return to study in USM, must adhere to the existing course registration
conditions in USM.
Application Procedure for Attending Courses/Credit Transfer
USM students who would like to attend courses/credit transfer at other IPTAs
should apply using Unit Exemption Form.
26
The application form should be submitted for the Dean's approval for the
programme of study within three months before the application is submitted to
other IPTA for consideration.
2.5 Academic Integrity
"Integrity without knowledge is weak and useless. Knowledge without integrity
is dangerous and weak" – Samuel Johnson
Being a student of the University Sains Malaysia requires a firm adherence to
the basic values, integrity, purpose and meaning of a university education. The
most essential values in academia are rooted on the principles of truth seeking in
knowledge and honesty with regards to the intellectual property of oneself and
of others. Thus, students must bear the responsibility of maintaining these
principles in all work done in their academic endeavour.
Academic dishonesty violates the fundamental purpose of preserving and
maintaining the integrity of university education and will not be tolerated. The
following, although not exhaustive, are examples of practices or actions that are
considered dishonest acts in academic pursuit.
(a) Cheating
Cheating is the unauthorised use of information or other aids in any
academic exercise. There are numerous "infamous" ways and methods of
cheating including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Copying from others during a test or an exam.
Using unauthorised materials or devices (calculator, PDA, mobile
phone, pager, etc.) during a test or an exam.
Asking or allowing another student to take a test or an exam for you
and vice-versa.
Sharing answers or programmes for an assignment or project.
Tampering with marked/graded work after it has been returned, then
resubmitting it for remarking/regrading.
Allowing others to do the research, writing, programming, or other
types of assignment.
Submitting identical or similar work in more than one course without
consulting or prior permission from the lecturers involved.
Below is an excerpt from the University and University College Act 1971,
Universiti Sains Malaysia, Discipline of Students, Rule 1999 regarding conduct
during examination (Part II, Provision 8):
27
Conduct during examination
8. No student can(a)
take any form of books, worksheets, documents, pictures or any
other materials, other than those authorised by the examiner, into or
out of any examination room, or receive any form of books,
worksheets, documents, pictures or any other materials from
outsiders when in examination room. Students can receive any form
of books, worksheets, documents, pictures or any other materials
recommended by the examiner or the Board of Examiners, and
authorized by the Vice-Chancellor
(b) write, or have somebody else to write, any information or to draw
diagrams which can be related to the examination taken by the
student, on any parts of the body, or on the clothing’s worn by the
student.
(c) contact with other students during an examination through any form
of communication, or
(d) cheat or try to cheat or act in any way that can be interpreted as
cheating.
(b) Plagiarism
Plagiarism is "academic theft". It violates the intellectual property rights of
the author. Simply put, it is the use, in part or whole, of other's words or
ideas and claiming it as yours without proper attribution to the original
author. It includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Copying and pasting information, graphics or media from the Internet
into your work without citing the source.
Paraphrasing or summarising other's written or spoken words that are
not common knowledge, without referencing the source.
Not putting quote marks around parts of the source that you copy
exactly.
Using someone else's work or acquiring papers, assignment, project or
research you did not do and turning it in as if you had done the work
yourself.
Giving incorrect information about the source of reference.
Not acknowledging collaborators in an assignment, paper, project or
research.
Plagiarism is, however, often misunderstood. There are numerous sources
in the Internet that describe plagiarism and explain acceptable ways for
using borrowed words. Students should explore the relevant materials.
28
Below is an excerpt from the University and University College Act 1971,
Universiti Sains Malaysia, Discipline of Students, Rule 1999 regarding
prohibition against plagiarism (Part II, Provision 6):
Prohibitions against plagiarism
6. (1) A student shall not plagiarise any idea, writing, data or invention
belonging to another person.
(2) For the purpose of this rule, plagiarism includes:
(a) the act of taking an idea, writing, data or invention of another
person and claiming that the idea, writing, data or invention is
the result of one's own findings or creation; or
(b) an attempt to make out or the act of making out, in such a way,
that one is the original source or the creator of an idea,
writing, data or invention which has actually been taken from
some other source.
(3) Without prejudice to the generality of sub rule (2), a student
plagiarises when he/she:
(a) publishes, with himself/herself as the author, an abstract,
article, scientific or academic paper, or book which is wholly
or partly written by some other person;
(b) incorporates himself/herself or allows himself/herself to be
incorporated as a co-author of an abstract, article, scientific or
academic paper, or book, when he/she has not at all made any
written contribution to the abstract, article, scientific or
academic paper, or book;
(c) forces another person to include his/her name in the list of coresearchers for a particular research project or in the list of
co-authors for a publication when he/she has not made any
contribution which may qualify him/her as a co-researcher or
co-author;
(d) extract academic data which are the result of research
undertaken by some other person, such as laboratory findings
or field work findings or data obtained through library
research, whether published or unpublished, and incorporate
those data as part of his/her academic research without giving
due acknowledgement to the actual source;
(e) uses research data obtained through collaborative work with
some other person, whether or not that other person is a staff
member or a student of the University, as part of another
distinct personal academic research of his/her, or for a
publication In his/her own name as sole author, without
29
obtaining the consent of his/her co-researchers prior to
embarking on his/her personal research or prior to publishing
the data;
(f) transcribes the ideas or creations of others kept in whatever
form, whether written, printed or available in electronic form,
or in slide form, or in whatever form of teaching or research
apparatus, or in any other form, and claims whether directly or
indirectly that he/she is the creator of that idea or creation;
(g) translates the writing or creation of another person from one
language to another whether or not wholly or partly, and
subsequently presents the translation in whatever form or
manner as his/her own writing or creation; or
(h) extracts ideas from another person's writing or creation and
makes certain modifications without due reference to the
original source and rearranges them in such a way that it
appears as if he/she is the creator of those ideas.
(c) Fabrication
Unauthorised invention, alteration, falsification or misleading use of data,
information or citation in any academic work constitutes fabrication.
Fabricated information neither represent the student's own effort nor the
truth concerning a particular investigation or study thus violates the
principle of truth seeking in knowledge. Some examples are:
•
•
•
•
•
Making up or changing of data or result, or using someone else's result,
in an experiment, assignment or research.
Citing sources that are not actually used or referred to.
Intentional listing of incorrect or fictitious references.
Falsifying of academic records or documents to gain academic
advantage.
Forging signatures of authorisation in any academic record or other
university document.
(d) Collusion
The School does not differentiate between those who commit an act of
academic dishonesty with those who knowingly allow or help others in
performing those acts. Some examples of collusion include:
•
•
•
•
Paying, bribing or allowing someone to do an assignment, test/exam,
project or research for you.
Doing or assisting others in an assignment, test/exam, project or
research for something in return.
Permitting your work to be submitted as the work of others.
Providing material, information, or sources to others knowing that such
aids could be used in any dishonest act.
30
(e) Unfair Advantage
A student may obtain an unfair advantage over another, which is also a
breach of academic integrity, in several ways including:
•
•
•
•
Gaining access to, stealing, reproducing or circulating of test or exam
material prior to its authorised time.
Depriving others of the use of library material by stealing, defacing,
destroying or hiding it.
Intentionally interfering with other's effort to do their academic work.
Altering or destroying work or computer files/programmes that belong
to others or those that are meant for the whole class.
(f) Consequences of Violating Academic Integrity
Both students and academic staff must assume the responsibility of
protecting and upholding the academic integrity of the university. In the
event that a student encounters any incident that denotes academic
dishonesty, the student is expected to report it to the relevant lecturer. The
lecturer is then responsible to substantiate the violation and is encouraged to
confront the perpetrator(s) to discuss the facts surrounding the allegation,
and report the matter to the Deputy Deans or the Dean of the School.
If the lecturer found that the student is guilty, an appropriate punitive
grading may be applied, depending on the extent of the violation. Examples
of punitive grading are giving lower grade or "F" on the assignment, test,
project, or lower grade or "F" for the whole course.
If the violation is deemed serious by the lecturer, the matter will be brought
to the attention of the University Disciplinary Authority where appropriate
action will be taken. If a student is caught in an examination, the University
Examination Board will pursue the matter according to the university's
procedure. The consequence then may range from a warning, fine not
exceeding RM200, exclusion from any specific part or parts of the
University for a specified period, suspension from being a student of the
University for a specified period, or expulsion from the University
(University and University College Act 1971, Universiti Sains Malaysia,
Discipline of Students, Rule 1999).
Below is an excerpt from the University and University College Act 1971,
Universiti Sains Malaysia, Discipline of Students, Rule 1999 regarding
Disciplinary Punishment (Part II, Provision 48):
31
Disciplinary punishment
48.
A student who commits a disciplinary offense under these Rules and
found guilty of the offense can be punished according to any one or any
two or more of the following appropriate actions;
(a) warning;
(b) fine not more than two hundred ringgit;
(c) banned from entering any or certain premises of the University for
a specified period;
(d) suspended from being a student of the University for a specified
period;
(e) dismissed from the University
2.6 USM Mentor Programme
Mentor Programme acts as a support-aid that involves the staff undergoing
special training as a consultant and guide to USM community who would like to
share their feelings and any psychosocial aspects that could harm their social
functions. This programme manages psychosocial issues in a more effective
manner and finally could improve the well-being of individuals in order to
achieve life of better quality.
Objectives
(a) As a co-operation and mutual assistance mechanism for dealing with stress,
psychosocial problems and many more in order to reinforce the well-being
of the USM community.
(b) To inculcate the spirit of unity and the concept of helping one another by
appointing a well-trained mentor as a social agent who promotes caring
society for USM
(c) To produce more volunteers to assist those who need help
(d) To prevent damages in any psychosocial aspects before they reach a critical
stage.
For more information, please visit www.usm.my/mentor
32
2.7 Student Exchange Programme
(a) Study Abroad Scheme
The student exchange programme is an opportunity for USM students to study
one or two semesters abroad at any USM partners institutions. Ideally,
students are encouraged to participate in the exchange programme within their
third to fifth semester (3 years degree programme) and within third to seventh
semester (4 years degree programme).
Studies abroad are planned beforehand with the Dean or Deputy Dean of
the respective School, and with the International Office. Credits earned at
an associate university are transferable as a part of credit accumulation for
graduation.
(b) Student Exchange Programme between Local Higher Education
Institutions (RPPIPT)
This is a programme that allows students of public higher learning institutions to
do an exchange programme for a semester between the public higher institutions
itself. Students can choose any relevant courses and apply for credit transfers.
For more information, please visit http://www.usm.my/io or contact the
Academic Collaboration Unit, International Office at +604 – 653 2775/2778.
33
3.0 UNIVERSITY REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Summary of University Requirements
Students are required to take 15 - 22 units of the following University/Option
courses for University requirements:
University Requirements
Unit
1
Bahasa Malaysia
2
2
English Language
4
3
Local Students
• Islamic and Asian Civilisations (TITAS) (2 Units)
• Ethnic Relations (2 Units)
• Core Entrepreneurship* (2 Units)
6
International Students
• Malaysian Studies (4 Units)
• Option/Bahasa Malaysia/English Language (2 Units)
4
Third Language/Co-Curriculum /Skill Course/Options
Students have to choose one of the followings:
• Third Language Package
• Co-Curriculum** (1-6 units)
• Skill Course/Options
3 – 10
Total
15 – 22
* Students from Schools which have a similar course as this are exempted from
following this course. The units should be replaced by an option course.
** Students from the School of Education are required to choose a uniformed body cocurriculum package. Students from the School of Medical Sciences and School of
Dentistry are required to register two (2) units of Co-Curriculum course in year Two.
Students from the School of Health Sciences are required to register one (1) unit of
Co-Curriculum course.
Details of the University requirements are given in the following sections.
3.2 Bahasa Malaysia
(a)
Local Students
The requirements are as follows:
• LKM400/2 - Bahasa Malaysia IV
34
All Malaysian students must take LKM400 and pass with the minimum of grade
C in order to graduate.
Entry requirements for Bahasa Malaysia are as follows:
No
Qualification
Grade
1.
(a) SPM/MCE/SC
(or equivalent
qualification)
(b) STPM/HSC
(or equivalent
qualification)
1-6
Note:
(b)
Level of
Entry
LKM400
Typ
e
U
Unit
s
2
Status
Graduation
requirement
P/S
To obtain credit units for Bahasa Malaysia courses, a minimum grade
of C is required.
Students may obtain advice from the School of Languages, Literacies
and Translation if they have different Bahasa Malaysia qualification
from the above.
International Students
• International students pursuing Bachelor’s degrees in Science,
Accounting, Arts (ELLS), Education (TESL) and Housing, Building
and Planning.
All international students in this category are required to take the following
courses:
Code
LKM100
Type
U
Units
2
• International students (non-Indonesian) pursuing Bachelor’s degrees in
Arts.
International students in this category are required to take and pass three
Intensive Malay Language courses before they commence their Bachelor’s
degree programmes.
Code
LKM101
LKM102
LKM201
Course
Bahasa Malaysia Persediaan I
Bahasa Malaysia Persediaan II
Bahasa Malaysia Pertengahan
35
Duration
4 months
4 months
4 months
The Bahasa Malaysia graduation requirement for this category of students is as
follows:
Code
LKM300
Type
U
Units
2
• International students (Indonesian) pursuing Bachelor’s degrees in
Arts.
The Bahasa Malaysia graduation requirement for this category of students is as
follows:
Code
LKM200
LKM300
Note:
Type
U
U
Units
2
2
Students must pass with a minimum grade of C for type U courses.
3.3 English Language
All Bachelor’s degree students must take 4 units of English Language courses in
fulfillment of the University requirement for graduation.
(a)
Entry Requirements for English Language Courses
No
English Language
Qualification
Grade
Level of
Entry
Status
1.
*MUET
LSP401/402/403/404
†Discretion of Dean
Band 6
A-C
LHP
451/452/453/
454/455/456/
457/458/459
Compulsory/
Option/Type U
(2 Units)
2.
*MUET
LSP300
†Discretion of Dean
Band 5
A-C
LSP
401/402/403/
404
Compulsory/
Type U
(2 Units)
3.
*MUET
LMT100
†Discretion of Dean
Band 4
A-C
LSP300
Compulsory/
Type U
(2 Units)
4.
*MUET
†Discretion of Dean
Band 3/2/1
(Score
0 - 179)
LMT100/
Re-sit MUET
Pre-requisite/
Type Z
(2 Units)
* MUET: Malaysia University English Test.
36
† Students may obtain advice from the School of Languages, Literacies and
Translation if they have different English Language qualification from the
above.
Note:
• Students are required to accumulate four (4) units of English for graduation.
• In order to obtain units in English Language courses, students have to pass with
a minimum grade of C.
• Students with a Score 260 - 300 (Band 6) in MUET must accumulate the 4 units
of
English
from
the
courses
in
the
post-advanced
level
(LHP451/452/453/454/455/456/457/ 458/459*). They can also take foreign
language courses to replace their English language units but they must first
obtain a written consent from the Dean of the School of Languages, Literacies
and Translation.
(Please use the form that can be obtained from the School of Languages,
Literacies and Translation.)
[*The number of units for LHP457 is 4 and for LHP451, 452, 453, 454, 455,
456, 458 and 459 is 2.]
• Students with a score of 179 and below in MUET are required to resit MUET to
improve their score to Band 4 or take LMT100 and pass with a minimum grade
of C.
(b) English Language Courses (Compulsory English Language Units)
The English Language courses offered as University courses are as follows:
N
o
Code/Unit
1.
LMT100/2
Preparatory
English
Students from all Schools
2.
LSP300/2
Academic
English
Students from all Schools
3.
LSP401/2
General English
Students from:
School of Education Studies (Arts)
School of Fine Arts
School of Humanities
School of Social Sciences
4.
LSP402/2
Scientific and
Medical English
Students from:
School of Biological Sciences
School of Physics
School of Chemical Sciences
School of Mathematical Sciences
School of Industrial Technology
School of Education Studies (Science)
School of Medical Sciences
School of Health & Dental Sciences
Course Title
37
School (If Applicable)
School of Pharmaceutical Sciences
5.
LSP403/2
Business and
Communication
English
Students from:
School of Management
School of Communication
6.
LSP404/2
Technical and
Engineering
English
Students from:
School of Computer Sciences
School of Housing, Building and
Planning
Schools of Engineering
7.
LDN 101/2
English For
Nursing I
Students from School of Health
Sciences
8.
LDN 201/2
English For
Nursing II
Students from School of Health
Sciences
3.4 Local Students - Islamic and Asian Civilisations/Ethnic Relations/Core
Entrepreneurship
(a)
Islamic and Asian Civilisations (The course is conducted in Bahasa
Malaysia)
The following course is compulsory to pass (with a minimum grade of C):
HTU 223 – Islamic and Asian Civilisation (TITAS) (2 units)
This course aims to increase students’ knowledge on history, principles, values,
main aspect of Malay civilization, Islamic civilization and its culture. With the
academic exposure to cultural issues and civilization in Malaysia, it is hoped
that students will be more aware of issues that can contribute to the cultivation
of the culture of respect and harmony among the plural society of Malaysia.
Among the topics in this course are Interaction among Various Civilization,
Islamic Civilization, Malay Civilization, Contemporary Challenges faced by the
Islamic and Asian Civilization and Islamic Hadhari Principles.
(b)
Ethnic Relations (The course is conducted in Bahasa Malaysia)
The following course is compulsory to pass (with a minimum grade of C):
SHE 101 – Ethnic Relations (2 units)
This course is an introduction to ethnic relations in Malaysia. This course is
designed with 3 main objectives: (1) to introduce students to the basic concept
and the practices of social accord in Malaysia, (2) to reinforce basic
understanding of challenges and problems in a multi-ethnic society, and (3) to
provide an understanding and awareness in managing the complexity of ethnic
relations in Malaysia. At the end of this course, it is hoped that students will be
38
able to identify and apply the skills to issues associated with ethnic relations in
Malaysia.
(c)
Core Entrepreneurship (The course is conducted in Bahasa Malaysia)
The following course is compulsory to pass (with a minimum grade of C):
WUS 101 – Core Entrepreneurship (2 units)
This course aims to provide basic exposure to students in the field of
entrepreneurship and business, with emphasis on the implementation of the
learning aspects while experiencing the process of executing business projects in
campus. The mode of teaching is through interactive lectures, practical, business
plan proposal, execution of entrepreneurial projects and report presentations.
Practical experiences through hands-on participation of students in business
projects management will generate interest and provide a clearer picture of
entrepreneurship world. The main learning outcome is the assimilation of
culture and entrepreneurship work ethics in their everyday life. This initiative is
made to open the minds and arouse the spirit of entrepreneurship among target
groups that possess the potentials to become successful entrepreneurs. By
exposing entrepreneurial knowledge to all students, it is hoped that it will
accelerate the effort to increase the number of middle class entrepreneurs in the
country.
For more information, please refer to the Co-curriculum Program Reference
Book.
3.5 International Students - Malaysian Studies/Option
(a)
Malaysian Studies
The following course is compulsory to pass (with a minimum grade of C) for all
international students:
SEA205E - Malaysian Studies (4 Units)
This course investigates the structure of the Malaysian system of government
and the major trends in contemporary Malaysia. Emphasis will be given both to
current issues in Malaysian politics and the historical and economic
developments and trends of the country. The discussion begins with a review of
the independence process. An analysis of the formation and workings of the
major institutions of government – parliament, judiciary, bureaucracy, and the
electoral and party systems will follow this. The scope and extent of Malaysian
democracy will be considered, especially in light of current changes and
developments in Malaysian politics. The second part of the course focuses on
specific issues: ethnic relations, national unity and the national ideology;
development and political change; federal-state relations; the role of religion in
39
Malaysian politics; politics and business; Malaysia in the modern world system;
civil society; law, justice and order; and directions for the future.
(b)
Option/Bahasa Malaysia/English Language (2 Units)
International students need to fulfill a further 2 units of option course or
additional Bahasa Malaysia/English Language course.
3.6 Third Language/Co-Curriculum/Skill Courses/Options
Students have to choose one of the followings (A/B/C):
(A)
Third Language Package (6 Units)
Third Language Courses are offered as University courses. They are
offered as a package of three (3) levels, 2 units per level. The total
number of units per package is 6. Students are requested to complete all
levels (3 semesters). The packages offered are as follows:
(B)
Commn.
Arabic
Commn.
Chinese
Commn.
Japanese
Commn.
German
Commn.
Korean
LTA100/2
LTC100/2
LTJ100/2
LTG100/2
LTK100/2
LTA200/2
LTC200/2
LTJ200/2
LTG200/2
LTK200/2
LTA300/2
LTC300/2
LTJ300/2
LTG300/2
LTK300/2
Commn.
French
Commn.
Spanish
Commn.
Tamil
Commn.
Thai
LTP100/2
LTE100/2
LTT100/2
LTS100/2
LTP200/2
LTE200/2
LTT200/2
LTS200/2
LTP300/2
LTE300/2
LTT300/2
LTS300/2
Uniformed/Seni Silat Cekak Co-Curriculum Package (4 - 6 Units)
Students who choose to take packaged co-curriculum courses are required
to complete all levels of the package. It is compulsory for students from
the School of Education to choose a uniformed body co-curriculum
package from the list below (excluding Seni Silat Cekak). The cocurriculum packages offered are as follows:
40
•
•
•
Armed Uniformed/Seni Silat Cekak Co-Curriculum Package
(6 Units) (3 years)
PALAPES
Tentera
Darat
(Army)
PALAPES
Tentera
Laut
(Navy)
PALAPES
Tentera
Udara
(Air Force)
SUKSIS
(Student
Police
Volunteer)
Seni
Silat
Cekak
WTD102/2
WTL102/2
WTU102/2
WPD101/2
WCC123
/2
WTD202/2
WTL202/2
WTU202/2
WPD201/2
WCC223
/2
WTD302/2
WTL302/2
WTU302/2
WPD301/2
WCC323
/2
Unarmed Uniformed Co-Curriculum Package (4 Units) (2 Years)
Kelana Siswa
(Rover Training)
Bulan Sabit Merah
(Red Crescent)
Ambulans St. John
(St. John Ambulance)
WLK101/2
WBM101/2
WJA101/2
WLK201/2
WBM201/2
WJA201/2
Unarmed Uniformed Co-Curriculum Package (2 Units) (1 Year)
SISPA (Siswa Siswi Pertahanan Awam) (Public Defense)
(offered in Health Campus only)
WLK101/2
WLK201/2
(C)
Co-Curriculum/Skill Course/Options (1 – 6 Units)
All students are encouraged to follow the co-curriculum courses and
are given a maximum total of 6 units for Community Service, Culture,
Sports, Innovation & Initiatives and Leadership (Students from the
School of Medical Sciences and School of Dentistry are required to
register for two (2) units of Co-Curriculum course in Year Two).
(Students from the School of Health Sciences must take at least one of
the co-curriculum courses while those from the School of Education
must take the uniformed co-curriculum package [excluding Seni Silat
Cekak]). Students who do not enroll for any co-curriculum courses or
who enroll for only a portion of the 3 units need to replace these units
with skill/option courses. The co-curriculum, skill and option courses
offered are as follows:
41
(i) Community Service, Culture, Sports, Innovation & Initiatives and
Leadership Co-Curriculum Courses
Packaged
(Students are required to complete all levels)
Khidmat
Masyarakat
(Community
Service)
(2 Years)
WKM101/1
Jazz Band
(3 Years)
Karate
(3 Semesters)
Taekwondo
(3
Semesters)
WCC108/1
WSC108/1
WSC115/1
WKM201/1
WCC208/1
WSC208/1
WSC215/1
WCC308/1
WSC308/1
WSC315/1
Non-Packaged (1 Semester)
Culture
Sports
WCC103/1 - Catan (Painting)
WSC105/1 - Bola Tampar
(Volley Ball)
WCC105/1 - Gamelan
WSC106/1 - Golf
WCC107/1 - Guitar
WSC110/1 - Memanah
(Archery)
WCC109/1 - Koir (Choir)
WSC111/1 - Ping Pong (Table
Tennis)
WCC110/1 - Kraftangan
(Handcrafting)
WSC112/1 - Renang
(Swimming)
WCC115/1 - Tarian Moden
(Modern Dance)
WSC113/1 - Aerobik
(Aerobic)
WCC116/1 - Tarian Tradisional
(Traditional Dance)
WSC114/1 - Skuasy (Squash)
WCC117/1 - Teater Moden
(Modern Theatre)
WSC116/1 - Tenis (Tennis)
WCC118/1 - Wayang Kulit Melayu
(Malay Shadow Play)
WSC119/1 - Badminton
WCC119/1 - Senaman Qigong Asas
(Basic Qigong Exercise)
WSC122/1 - Selaman SCUBA
(SCUBA Diving)
WCC219 – Senaman Qigong
Pertengahan (Intermediate
Qigong Exercise)
WSC123/1 - Kriket (Cricket)
WCC124/1 – Kompang Berlagu
WCC124/1 – Sepak Takraw
WCC122/1 - Seni Memasak
(Culinary Art)
WSC 125/1 – Futsal
WCC127/1 – Kesenian Muzik
WSC 126/1 – Bola Jaring
42
Nasyid (Nasyid Musical
Art)
Innovation & Initiative
(Netball)
Leadership (Kepimpinan)
WCC120/1 - Canting Batik (Batik
Painting)
WCC121/1 - Seni Khat
(Calligraphic Art)
WSC 127/1 – Pengurusan
Acara 1 (Event
Management 1)
WSC 227/1 – Pengurusan
Acara 2 (Event
Management 2)
WCC125/1 – Seni Wau Tradisional
(Traditional Kite Art)
WCC128 – Seni Sulaman & Manik
Labuci (Embroidery &
Beads Sequins Art)
WCC 130 – Seni Fotografi SLR
Digital (Digital SLR
Photography Art)
(ii) HTV201/2 - Teknik Berfikir (Thinking Techniques)
(iii) Other option/skill courses as recommended or required by the
respective school (if any)
(iv) English Language Courses
The following courses may be taken as university courses to fulfill
the compulsory English Language requirements (for Band 5 and
Band 6 in MUET) or as skill/option courses:
No
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Code/Unit
LHP451/2
LHP452/2
LHP453/2
LHP454/2
LHP455/2
LHP456/2
LHP457/4
LHP458/2
Course Title
Effective Reading
Business Writing
Creative Writing
Academic Writing
English Pronunciation Skills
Spoken English
Speech Writing and Public Speaking
English for Translation
(Offered only in Semester II)
9.
LHP459/2
English for Interpretation
(Offered only in Semester I)
43
(v) Foreign Language Courses
The foreign language courses offered by the School of Languages,
Literacies and Translation can be taken by students as option or
compulsory courses to fulfill the number of units required for
graduation. Students are not allowed to register for more than one
foreign language course per semester. They must complete at least
two levels of a foreign language course before they are allowed to
register for another foreign language course. However, students are
not required to complete all four levels of one particular foreign
language course. The foreign language courses offered are as
follows:
Arabic
Chinese
Japanese
German
Spanish
LAA100/2 LAC100/2 LAJ100/2 LAG100/2 LAE100/2
LAA200/2 LAC200/2 LAJ200/2 LAG200/2 LAE200/2
LAA300/2 LAC300/2 LAJ300/2 LAG300/2 LAE300/2
LAA400/2 LAC400/2 LAJ400/2 LAG400/2 LAE400/2
French
LAP100/2
LAP200/2
LAP300/2
LAP400/2
Thai
LAS100/2
LAS200/2
LAS300/2
LAS400/2
44
Tamil
LAT100/2
LAT200/2
LAT300/2
Korean
LAK100/2
LAK200/2
LAK300/2
4.0
SCHOOL OF MATERIALS AND MINERAL RESOURCES
ENGINEERING
(http://material.eng.usm.my/v2/)
4.1
INTRODUCTION
The School of Materials and Mineral Resources Engineering (SMMRE) started
its program since 1984 in Universiti Sains Malaysia (USM), Penang under the
School of Industrial Technology and Engineering Sciences. With the
advancement of technology and market demand for skilled engineers in the
country, USM took the initiative to fulfill the requirement by having its own
engineering school separated from other disciplines of applied sciences.
In March 1986, the engineering disciplines under the School of Industrial
Technology were separated to form their own schools, which include the
formation of the School of Materials and Mineral Resources Engineering. USM
had then housed the new campus at Ipoh before moving to Seri Iskandar, Perak.
However, after a lapsed of 15 years, in May 2001, the campus was moved to the
new site situated at Nibong Tebal, Seberang Perai Selatan, Penang.
Compared to other schools or faculty in other Institutes of Higher Learning in
Malaysia, the School of Materials and Mineral Resources Engineering is unique
because it offers three programs, these are Materials Engineering, Mineral
Resources Engineering and Polymer Engineering at bachelor degree (honours)
level for each programme.
Polymer Engineering program is the latest addition to the school that
commenced in April 2002. The program is an upgrading of Polymer Technology
program that was originally under the School of Industrial Technology in USM
Penang.
In general, the three programs include specialization as follows:
(i)
The Material Engineering emphasizes on materials such as metal,
ceramic, composite, polymer and semiconductor and electronic
materials. These involve design and production of materials, quality
control and the materials properties.
(ii)
Mineral Resources Engineering focuses on areas of mining, processing
and management of mineral resources and the environment.
(iii) Polymer Engineering focuses on polymeric materials such as plastics,
rubber, latex and composites. These involve synthesis, processing,
design and production of polymer products, quality control and the
properties of polymers.
45
A minimum of four years or 8 semesters are required to complete for each of the
program. Graduates who have completed the program of study successfully will
be awarded B. Eng (Honours) (Materials Engineering), B. Eng (Honours)
(Mineral Resources Engineering) or B. Eng (Honours) (Polymer Engineering)
accordingly, which is recognized locally and internationally.
4.2
OBJECTIVE AND PHILOSOPHY
In principal, Universiti Sains Malaysia, upholds the mission among which to
build a greater understanding and strive to provide quality education as well as
efficient and professional services through vast knowledge, innovation and latest
expertise while upholding common ethical values.
With that, SMMRE through its three programmes have one similar objective
that is to produce materials, mineral resources and polymer engineers that are
professionally qualified, knowledgeable and matured, highly skilled, capable
and able to compete at national and international level and giving ideas and
solution towards engineering crisis through analytic, innovative and proactive
thinking. With these philosophies, SMMRE programmes curriculum have been
design to fulfill the government aspiration towards vision 2020, industrial needs
and at par with the growth of world globalization technology. Therefore, the
existing curriculum is moulded with the following quality:
•
•
•
•
Recognized by professional bodies including Board of Engineers Malaysia
(BEM) and Institution of Engineers Malaysia (IEM).
Balanced integration of teaching based on theory with practical.
Global in identifying various specializations in tandem with the needs and
development of local and international market.
To develop and generate graduates with knowledge, ethics, quality, skill,
innovative and committed.
Vision of SMMRE
To be an established and respectable world class academic and research school
of excellence based on current technology.
Mission of SMMRE
To be globally recognized as a dynamic engineering school that produces
creative, innovative and resourceful intellectuals with an ethos towards life-long
learning that will contribute towards the creation of knowledge based society.
46
4.3
MAIN ADMINISTRATIVE STAFFS
DEAN
Professor Ahmad Fauzi Mohd Noor
DEPUTY DEAN
DEPUTY DEAN
DEPUTY DEAN
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Hashim
Hussin
(Academic and Student
Development)
Professor Hanafi Ismail
(Postgraduate Studies and
Research)
Mr. Tuan Besar
Tuan Sarif
(Industry & Community
Network)
PROGRAMME
CHAIRMAN
PROGRAMME
CHAIRMAN
PROGRAMME
CHAIRMAN
Assoc. Prof. Ir. Dr.
Mariatti Jaafar @
Mustapha
(Materials Eng.)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Syed
Fuad Saiyid Hashim
(Mineral Resources Eng.)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Zulkifli
Mohamad Ariff
(Polymer Eng.)
CHIEF ASSISTANT REGISTRAR
ASSISTANT REGISTRAR
Mr. Mior Zulbahri M. Chek
Mrs. Nor Asmah Redzuan
47
ADMINISTRATIVE
TELEPHONE
EXTENSION
E-MAIL
Dean
Professor Ahmad Fauzi Mohd Noor
6100/6174
[email protected]
Deputy Dean
(Academic and Student Development)
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Hashim Hussin
6102/6114
[email protected]
Deputy Dean
(Postgraduate Studies and Research)
Professor Hanafi Ismail
6103/6113
[email protected]
Deputy Dean
(Industry & Community Network)
Mr. Tuan Besar Tuan Sarif
6127
[email protected]
5262
[email protected]
Mineral Resources Engineering
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Syed Fuad Saiyid Hashim
6181
[email protected].
my
Polymer Engineering
Assoc. Prof. Dr. Zulkifli Mohamad Ariff
6173
[email protected]
Chief Assistant Registrar
Mr. Mior Zulbahri M. Chek
6105
[email protected]
Assistant Registrar
Mrs. Nor Asmah Redzuan
6168
[email protected]
PROGRAMME CHAIRMAN
Materials Engineering
Assoc. Prof. Ir. Dr. Mariatti Bt. Jaafar @
Mustapha
48
4.4
LIST OF ACADEMIC STAFFS
TELEPHONE
EXTENSION
6100/6174
6112
6113
6161
6122
6128
6182
PROFESSORS
Ahmad Fauzi B. Mohd Noor, Dr.
Eric Goh K.H., Ir. Dr. Dato’
Hanafi b. Ismail, Dr.
Hazizan b. Md Akil, Dr.
Radzali b. Othman, Dr., P.M.P
Zainal Arifin b. Ahmad, Dr.
Zainal Arifin b. Mohd Ishak, Dr.
TELEPHONE
EXTENSION
ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS
Ahmad Azmin b. Mohamad, Dr.
Ahmad Badri b. Ismail, Mr.
Azhar b. Abu Bakar, Dr.
Azizan b. Aziz, Dr.
Azlan b. Ariffin, Dr.
Azura bt. A. Rashid, Dr.
Cheong Kuan Yew, Ir. Dr.
Chow Wen Shyang, Dr.
Hashim b. Hussin, Dr.
Hasmaliza bt. Mohamad, Dr.
Kamar Shah b. Ariffin, Dr.
Khairunisak bt. Abdul Razak, Dr.
Mariatti bt. Jaafar @ Mustapha, Ir. Dr.
Razaina bt. Mat Taib, Dr.
Sabar Derita Hutagalung, Dr.
Srimala a/p Sreekantan, Dr.
Syed Fuad b. Saiyid Hashim, Dr.
Zainovia bt. Lockman, Dr.
Zuhailawati bt. Hussain, Dr.
Zulkifli b. Ahmad, Dr.
Zulkifli b. Mohamad Ariff, Dr.
6118
6107
6179
5253
6176
6111
5259
6160
6114
5263
6116
6126
5262
6123
6171
5255
6181
6178
5258
6183
6173
TELEPHONE
EXTENSION
SENIOR LECTURERS
Khatijah Aisha bt. Yaacob, Dr.
Norlia bt. Baharun, Dr.
Nurulakmal bt. Mohd Sharif, Dr.
Tuan Besar b. Tuan Sarif, Mr.
5267
6121
6180
6127
49
E-MAIL
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
E-MAIL
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
E-MAIL
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
TELEPHONE
EXTENSION
LECTURERS
Anasyida bt. Abu Seman @ Ahmad, Dr.
Hareyani bt. Zabidi, Dr.
Julie Juliewatty bt. Mohamed, Dr.
Mohd. Hazizan b. Mohd. Hashim
Nadras bt. Othman, Dr.
Norazharuddin Shah b. Abdullah, Dr.
Pung Swee Yong, Dr.
Shah Rizal b. Kasim, Dr.
Sheikh Abdul Rezan b. Sheikh Abdul Hamid, Dr.
Sivakumar a/l Ramakrishnan, Dr.
Yeoh Fei Yee, Dr.
Zuratul Ain bt. Abdul Hamid, Dr.
VISITING PROFESSOR
Mihail Nazarov
RESEARCHER
Cheang Kok Keong, Dr.
5216
6124
5266
6109
6177
5261
5215
6172
5256
6110
6175
6153
Hasliza bt. Mat Saad, Mrs.
Mohamad Azwan b. Mad Naser, Mr.
Suhani bt. Abdullah, Mrs.
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
TELEPHONE
EXTENSION
E-MAIL
TELEPHONE
EXTENSION
6119
6131
6130
50
[email protected]
5225
6130
6131
VOCATIONAL TRAINING OFFICERS
[email protected]
E-MAIL
TELEPHONE
EXTENSION
Habsah bt. Haliman, Mrs.
Mohd Nazri b. Idris, Mr.
[email protected]
TELEPHONE
EXTENSION
6193
RESEARCH OFFFICERS
E-MAIL
[email protected]
E-MAIL
[email protected]
[email protected]
E-MAIL
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
4.5
EXTERNAL EXAMINERS
Materials Engineering
Professor Minoru Umemoto
Graduate School of Engineering,
Department of Mechanical Engineering
Toyohashi University of Technology,
Japan
Mineral Resources Engineering
Professor Tsuyoshi Hirajima
Laboratory of Mineral Processing, Recycling & Environmental Remediation
Department of Earth Resources Engineering
Faculty of Engineering
Kyushu University
Japan
Polymer Engineering
Professor Jang-Kyo Kim
Professor of Mechanical Engineering and
Associate Dean of Engineering,
Hong Kong University of Science & Technology,
Clear Water Bay, Kowloon
Hong Kong
4.6
INDUSTRY ADVISORY PANEL (IAP)
Materials Engineering
Ms. Chua Seok Cheng
General Manager
Southern Steel Bhd.
Mr. Zainuddin Md Zain
Engineering Manager
Asian Composites Manufacturing Sdn Bhd.
Mr. Arjun Kumar Kantimahanti
Senior Director,
Technology Development, Silterra Sdn. Bhd.
Dr. Anura Gaspe
Technical Manager
Johnson Swiss Sdn. Bhd.
51
Mineral Resources Engineering
Dato’ Hj Zulkifly Bin Abu Bakar
Director,
Pusat Penyelidikan Mineral,
Jabatan Mineral dan Geosains Malaysia
Tuan Haji Mustapha Lip
Timbalan Ketua Pengarah (Korporat & Ekonomi Mineral),
Jabatan Mineral dan Geosains Malaysia
Ir. Lee Kam Fatt
President
Institute of Quarrying Malaysia
Mr. Azmi Ngah
Quality Manager,
TOR Minerals (M) Sdn.Bhd.
Mr. Ir. Muhamad Asri Mahayuddin
c/o Bizworth Sdn. Bhd.
Polymer Engineering
Dr. Ng. Chee Mang
Managing Director,
Penchem Industries Sdn. Bhd.
Mr. Azhar Anuar
CEO NSERC Sdn. Bhd.
Mr. Raja Ismail Bin Raja Daud
M-Pol Precision Product Sdn Bhd.
Mr. Lu Eng Shean
Managing Director,
Cape Technology Sdn Bhd.
52
4.7
LABORATORY FACILITIES
The School is equipped with modern equipments for its undergraduate and
postgraduate programmes and for research purposes. To date, there are 36
laboratories equipped with, among others, included:
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[34]
[35]
[36]
[37]
[38]
Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) & Energy Dispersive X-Ray
(EDX)
Field Emission Electron Microscope (VPFESEM) & Energy Dispersive
X-Ray (EDX)
X-Ray Diffractometer (XRD)
X-Ray Fluorescence Spectrometer (XRF)
Servohydraulic Testing Machine
Spray Forming Machine
Particle Size Analyser
Microhardness Tester
Magnetic Separator
Ultrafine Grinding Machine
Furnaces
Hot Press
Plastic Injection Molding Machine
Rubber Injection Molding Machine
Hot & Cold Isostatic Press
Twin Screw Extruder
Internal Mixer
Crusher & Grinder
Autoclave Reactor
Potentiostat
Semiconductor Parametric Analyser
Scanning Probe Microscope
Corrosion Tester
Optical Microscopes
Dynamic Mechanical Analyser (DMA)
Differential Thermal Analysis (DTA) & Thermogravity Analyser
(TGA)
UV-VIS Spectrometer
Atomic Absorbtion Spectrometer (AAS)
Fourier Transform Infrared Analyser (FTIR)
Surface Area Analyser
Density Meter
Rheometer
Single Screw Extruder
Energy Dispersive X-Ray Fluorescence (EDXRF)
Semiconductor Parametric Analyser (SPM, AFM, STM)
Differential Scanning Calorimeter (DSC)
500kN Dymanic Universal Testing Machine (UTM)
Nano Particle Size Analyser
53
[39]
[40]
[41]
[42]
[43]
[44]
[45]
[46]
Zeta Potential Analyser
Benchtop X-Ray Diffraction (XRD)
Atomic Absorption Spectrometer (AAS + Graphite Furnace)
Inductively Coupled Plasma Optical / Atomic Emmision Spectroscopy
(ICP-OES)
Pultrusion
Twin Screw Extruder
Auto Dilute Viscometer
Differential Thermal Analyser (DTA)
Apart from the above, the school has a range of support equipments including
well equipped workshop. These equipments are operated by trained and
knowledgeable technical staff.
4.8
JOB OPPORTUNITIES
Graduates of B. Eng (Hons) in Materials, Mineral Resources and Polymer
Engineering have good job prospect especially with the growth of IT and that
the curriculum has been geared to the industrial needs and organizations such as
manufacturing and process industry, design industry, quarry, mining, research,
consultancy, institute of higher learning, training centres and government
agencies.
Career opportunities for Materials and Polymer Engineering include process
engineer, maintenance engineer, site engineer, site manager, design engineer,
plant engineer, control engineer, researcher and others. As for Mineral
Resources Engineering the graduate may be employed as mining engineer,
mineral processing engineer, quarry engineer, blasting engineer, plant engineer,
mine or quarry manager, drilling engineer and production engineer in oil
companies, research engineer and others.
4.9
POSTGRADUATE STUDIES AND RESEARCH
SMMRE also offers opportunities for postgraduate study for locals and foreign
graduates who wish to further their studies at higher level. Therefore, SMMRE
offers M. Sc and Ph. D programmes through research mode for all the three
programmes and M. Sc programmes through mix-mode (for Materials
Engineering).
Areas of research offered through research mode are (amongst others):
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Traditional Ceramic and Advanced Ceramics
Physical Mechanical and Applied Metallurgy
Extractive Metallurgy
Glass and Glass Ceramic
Composite (ceramic, metal and polymer)
Semiconductor Material and Electronic Material
54
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
Metal Coatings
Mining
Blasting
Geochemistry
Exploration
Environment and Pollution Control
Material Processing
Plastic
Rubber and Latex
Polymer Alloy and Mixture
Polymer Composite
Biomaterials
The Institute of Postgraduate studies of USM has the following entry
requirements in considering application by candidates:
(1)
Candidates for master’s programme must attain at least CGPA of 2.75
or related qualification, which are recognized by the University’s
Senate and Ministry of Higher Learning or Public Services Department.
(2)
For candidates having lower qualification, the application may also be
considered through working experiences or vast research background in
related area and endorsed by the School Board of SMMRE.
55
4.10.0
PROGRAMME FOR BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING (HONOURS)
(MATERIALS ENGINEERING)
PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES
1.
Employable graduates having knowledge in Materials Engineering
complemented by appropriate skills and attributes.
2.
Graduates having good leadership skills with the right attitudes and ethics.
3.
Creative and innovative graduates with design and soft skills to carry out
various problem solving tasks.
4.
Holistic graduates with sustainable development awareness.
5. Graduates who possess interest in research and lifelong learning, as well as
continuously striving for the forefront of technology.
PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
1.
Graduates have the ability to acquire and apply the principles of engineering
knowledge, science and mathematics to the practice of materials
engineering and related fields.
2.
Graduates have acquired in-depth technical skills in materials engineering
discipline.
3.
Graduates have the ability to identify, formulate and solve materials
engineering related problems.
4.
Graduates have the ability to design a system, component, or process related
to materials engineering to meet desired needs within realistic constraints:
economical, environmental and societal.
5.
Graduates have the ability to demonstrate the awareness of the
sustainability issues in materials engineering.
6.
Graduates have the understanding of the professional and ethical
responsibilities of materials engineers.
7.
Graduates have the ability to communicate effectively through written
reports, oral presentations and discussion.
8.
Graduates have the ability to function effectively as an individual and in a
team with the capability to be a leader.
9.
Graduates have the awareness of social, global, cultural and environment
responsibilities of a material engineer.
10. Graduates have the potential to enhance their professional development and
personal advancement through life-long learning.
56
57
4.10.1 CURRICULUM STRUCTURE FOR BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING (HONOURS) [MATERIALS ENGINEERING]
4.10.2
CURRICULUM
LEVEL 100
Semester I
EUM
EMM
EBB
EBS
EBB
113/3
101/3
113/3
110/2
155/2
Engineering Calculus
Engineering Mechanics
Engineering Materials
Engineering Drawing
Engineering Materials Introduction
Laboratory
Total
3
3
3
2
2
Unit
Lecture
3
3
3
0
0
Lab
0
0
0
2
2
-------13
--------
-------9
--------
-------4
--------
2
2
0
Total
3
3
3
3
2
-------14
--------
Unit
Lecture
3
3
3
3
0
-------12
--------
Lab
0
0
0
0
2
-------2
--------
2
2
0
University Requirement
LMT
100/2
English Language
SEMESTER BREAK
Semester II
EBB
EAS
EUM
EEU
EML
160/3
152/3
114/3
104/3
101/2
Physical Chemistry of Eng. Materials
Strength of Materials
Advanced Engineering Calculus
Electrical Technology
Engineering Practice
University Requirement
LKM
400/2
Bahasa Malaysia
SESSION BREAK
58
LEVEL 200
Semester I
EBB
EBB
EBB
EBB
EUP
202/3
250/2
236/3
245/3
222/3
Crystallography & Bonding In Solids
Computer Methods for Engineers
Materials Thermodynamics
Eng. Materials Characterization
Engineers In Society
Total
3
2
3
3
3
-------14
--------
Unit
Lecture
3
0
3
3
3
-------12
--------
Lab
0
2
0
0
0
-------2
--------
2
2
0
Total
2
4
Unit
Lecture
0
4
Lab
2
0
3
3
3
-------15
--------
3
3
3
-------13
--------
0
0
0
-------2
--------
2
2
2
2
0
0
University Requirement
LMT
200/2
English Language
SEMESTER BREAK
Semester II
EBB
EBB
204/2
212/4
EBB
EBB
EBB
215/3
220/3
225/3
Materials Characterization Lab.
Raw Materials and Structural
Ceramics
Semiconductor Materials
Engineering Polymers
Physical Metallurgy
University Requirement
HTU
SHE
211/2
100/2
Islamic & Asia Civilization
Ethnic Relationship
SESSION BREAK
59
LEVEL 300
Semester I
EBB
EBB
EBB
EUP
EBB
325/2
332/4
344/3
301/3
300/2
Microscopy Laboratory
Whiteware & Glasses
Mechanical Metallurgy
Engineering Management
Eng. Statistic
Total
2
4
3
3
2
-------14
--------
Unit
Lecture
0
4
3
3
2
-------12
--------
Lab
2
0
0
0
0
-------2
--------
3
3
3
3
0
0
3
3
0
Total
3
2
3
3
3
-------14
--------
Unit
Lecture
3
0
3
3
3
-------12
--------
Lab
0
2
0
0
0
-------2
--------
3
3
3
3
0
0
Electives
EBB
EBB
333/3
323/3
EBS
238/3
Transport Processes
Semiconductor Fabrication
Technology
Fluid Mechanics
SEMESTER BREAK
Semester II
EBB
EBB
EBB
EBB
EBS
316/3
317/2
337/3
342/3
323/3
Corrosion & Degradation
Materials Processing Laboratory
Advanced Materials & Composites
Quality Control & Management
Pyrometallurgy
Electives
EBS
EBB
339/3
338/3
Nanomaterials
Process Control
SESSION BREAK - EBB 350/5 Industrial Training
60
LEVEL 400
Semester I
EBB
405/3
EBB
EBB
EBB
441/3
443/4
407/1
Failure Analysis & Non Destructive
Testing
Applied Metallurgy
Technical Ceramics
Final Year Research Project
Total
3
Unit
Lecture
3
Lab
0
3
4
1
-------11
--------
3
4
0
-------10
--------
0
0
1
-------1
--------
3
3
0
3
3
3
3
0
0
Total
5
3
-------8
--------
Unit
Lecture
0
3
-------3
--------
Lab
5
0
-------5
--------
3
3
3
3
0
0
Electives
EBB
424/3
EBB
EBB
428/3
427/3
Semiconductor Devices & Opto
Electronics
Occupational Safety & Health
Technology & Application of
Engineering Polymer
SEMESTER BREAK
Semester II
EBB
EBB
407/5
408/3
Final Year Research Project
Materials Selection & Design
Electives
EBB
EBB
409/3
425/3
Fluid Power & Turbo Machinery
Design & Development of Ceramic
Products
SESSION BREAK
61
Level
UNIVERSITI
100
200
300
400
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
EBB 405/3
EBB 440/4
EBB 350/5
EBB 332/4
EBB 334/4
EUP 301/3
EBB 300/2
EBB 325/2
EBB 202/3
EBB 236/3
EBB 245/3
EUP 222/3
EBB 250/2
EBS 110/2
EBB 155/2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
EBB 113/3
EMM 101/3
EUM 113/3
7
8
9
Sem II
EBB
EBB
EBB
EBB
EBS
EBB
EBB
EBB
EBB
EBB
EBB
316/3
317/2
337/3
350/5
323/3
342/3
204/2
212/4
215/3
220/3
222/4
EML 101/2
EBB 160/3
EUM 114/3
EEU 104/3
EAS 152/3
LKM 400/2
HTU 211/2
SHE 101/2
Code
WUS 101/2
LSP 300/2
LSP404/2
Sem I
1
2
3
4
5
6
No.
Whiteware and Glasses
Mechanical Metallurgy
Engineering Management
Engineering Statistic
Corrosion and Degradation
Materials Processing Laboratory
Advanced Materials and Composites
Industrial Training (Materials Engineering)
Pyrometallurgy
Quality Control and Management
Failure Analysis and Non-Destructive Testing
Applied Metallurgy
Engineering Practice
Physical Chemistry of Engineering Materials
Crystallography and Bonding in Solids
Materials Thermodynamics
Engineering Materials Characterisation
Engineers In Society
Computer Methods for Engineers
Materials Characterisation Laboratory
Raw Materials and Structural Ceramics
Semiconductor Materials
Engineering Polymers
Physical Metallurgy
Microscopy Laboratory
Engineering Drawing
Engineering Materials Introduction Laboratory
Advanced Engineering Calculus
Electrical Technology
Strength of Materials
Engineering Materials
Engineering Mechanics
Engineering Calculus
Bahasa Malaysia IV
Islamic & Asia Civilisations
Ethnic Relations
Entrepreneurship
Academic English
Technical and Engineering English
CORE
62
UNIVERSITY REQUIREMENT
Course
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
I
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
II
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Emphasis to the Programme Outcomes
III
IV
V
VI
VII
VIII
4.10.3 COURSE PROGRAMME OUTCOME MATRIX (MATERIALS ENGINEERING)
/
/
/
/
/
IX
/
/
/
/
/
/
X
Level
300
400
ELECTIVE
Fluid Power and Turbo Machinery
Design and Development of Ceramic Products
Occupational Safety and Health
Semiconductor Devices and Optoelectronics
Technology and Application of Engineering Polymers
Process Control
Nanomaterials
Transport Processes
Fluid Mechanics
Semiconductor Fabrication Technology
Course
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
I
/
/
/
II
Graduates have the ability to identify, formulate and solve materials engineering related problems
X
IX
VIII
VII
VI
V
63
Graduates have the ability to communicate effectively through written reports, oral presentations and
discussion.
Graduates have the ability to function effectively as an individual and in a team with the capability to be a
leader
Graduates have the awareness of social, global, cultural and environment responsibilities of a material
engineer
Graduates have the potential to enhance their professional development and personal advancement
through life-long learning
Graduates have the understanding of the professional and ethical responsibilities of materials engineers
Graduates have the ability to design a system, component, or process related to materials engineering to
meet desired needs within realistic constraints: economical, environmental and societal
Graduates have the ability to demonstrate the awareness of the sustainability issues in materials
engineering
Graduates have acquired in-depth technical skills in materials engineering discipline
II
III
IV
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
III
/
/
/
/
/
IV
/
V
/
VI
VII
/
/
VIII
Emphasis to the Programme Outcomes
Legend:
Graduates have the ability to acquire and apply the principles of engineering knowledge, science and
mathematics to the practice of materials engineering and related fields.
EBB 409/3
52
I
EBB 425/3
EBB 428/3
51
50
EBB 424/3
49
EBB 338/3
EBB 427/3
47
48
EBB 339/3
EBB 333/3
Sem II
46
45
EBB 323/3
EBS 238/3
Code
43
Sem I
44
No.
/
/
IX
X
4.10.4
COURSE DESCRIPTION
EUM 113 Engineering Calculus
Objectives:
This course reviews the concept of one and multivariable calculus and
covers the concept of ordinary differential equation. This course will
provide students with a variety of engineering examples and
applications based on the above topics.
Synopsis:
Calculus of one variable:
Functions, techniques for solving differentiation and integration,
sequence and series, numerical solutions for solving differentiation and
integration.
Calculus of multivariable:
Scalar and vector fields, partial differentiation, chain rule, gradient,
directional derivative, Lagrange multiplier.
Multiple integral:
Double and triple integrals and their applications.
First order ordinary differential equation:
Solving differential equations: separable equations, homogenous and
non-homogenous equations, linear and non-linear equations, exact and
non-exact equations, Bernoulli equation and Ricatti equation.
Second and higher order ordinary differential equation:
Linear and homogeneous equations, non-homogeneous equations with
method of undetermined coefficients, variation of parameters, reduction
of order, D-operator, power series and Euler’s equation.
Laplace transform:
Definition and basic properties, step function, Direct Delta, Heaviside
function, Laplace transform method for solving ODE.
Numerical solutions:
Taylor, Euler and Runge Kutta methods for solving ODE.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Able to define the concept of one and multivariable
calculus.
Able to recognize different methods for solving
ODE.
Able to use the analytical and numerical methods for
solving ODE.
Able to apply the above concepts for solving
engineering problems.
64
References:
1. Glyn J., (2010).Modern Engineering Mathematics, 4th Edition .Pearson
2. Glyn, J., (2010).Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics, 4th Edition .Pearson
3. Silvanum P.Thompson, Martin Gardner (2008). Calculas Made Easy, Enlarge
Edition. Johnston Press
4. J.N.Sharma. (2007). Numerical Method for Engineers, 2nd Edition. Alpha Science
5. Smith R. T. and Minton, R., (2008), Calculus, 3rd edition, Mc Graw Hill.
6. Ramana,B.V (2007)Higher Engineering Mathematics, 1st Edition. Tata Mc Graw
Hill
7. O’Neil , P.V., (2007). Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics, 1st Edition
8. Kreiyzig,
E.,
(2010).
Advanced
Engineering
Mathematics,10th
Edition.Wiley.Thomson
9. Stroud,K.A
,
Dexter.J.Booth(2007).
Engineering
Mathematics,6th
.Edition.Industrial Press
10. James Stewart (2011).Calculus,7th Edition, Brooks cole
11. James Stewart (2011).Multivariable Calculus,7th Edition, Brooks Cole
12. Ron Larson,Bruce H. Edwards (2009). Calculus, 9th Edition. Brook Cole
13. Steven Chapra, Raymond Canale (2009).Numerical Method for Engineers,6th
Edition. Mc Graw Hill
14. D.Vaughan Griffith,I.M Smith (2006). Numerical Method for Engineers, 2nd
Edition. Chapman and Hall
EMM 101/3 – Engineering Mechanics
Objective:
To provide students with the fundamental concepts and principles of
rigid bodies in statics and dynamics equilibrium.
Synopsis:
This course is an introduction to the mechanics of rigid bodies. It is
divided into two areas: Statics and Dynamics. In Statics, the student
will learn the fundamental concepts and principles of rigid bodies in
static equilibrium. In Dynamics, the student will learn the fundamental
concepts and principles of the accelerated motion of a body (a particle).
Consideration is given on the fundamental of mechanics and structure
analysis, including concepts of free body diagram as well as force,
moment, couples, kinematic of motion, momentum, impulse,
conservation of energy and equilibrium analyses in two and three
dimensions.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
Able to identify and resolve force magnitudes and vectors into
components
Able to describe and draw the free-body diagram and to solve the
problems using the equations of equilibrium.
Able to define the system of forces and moments and calculate the
resultants of force using the concept of equilibrium system.
65
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to identify and calculate the centroid, centre of gravity and
area moment of inertia.
Able to describe the motion of a particle in terms of kinematics.
Able to apply equation of motion in solving dynamics problems.
Able to apply the principles of energy and momentum in solving
dynamics problems.
Hibbeler, R.C., Engineering Mechanics: Statics and Dynamics,
12th ed., SI Units, Prentice Hall, 2009.
Meriam, J.L. and Kraige, L.G., Engineering Mechanics: Statics
and Dynamics, 4th ed., Wiley, 1998.
Beer, F.P. and Johnston Jr.E.R., Vector Mechanics for Engineers:
Statics and Dynamics, 7th ed., SI Units, Mc Graw Hill, 2004.
EBB 113/3 - Engineering Materials
Objective:
Students are expected to acquire the fundamental knowledge on
engineering materials especially on the classification of materials,
properties and applications.
Synopsis:
The course is an introductory course on engineering materials which is
divided into three main parts. The first part includes the classifications
of materials that determine their applicability, the structure of the
materials explained by the quantum-mechanical principle that relates
electrons to energies, bonding scheme of different materials, the
structure of crystalline solids and introduction to imperfection in solids.
The second part covers the mechanical characteristics of materials for
service use and methods of assessing the mechanical characteristics of
materials. The second part also includes the behaviour of material in
thermal equilibrium (free energy concept, phase transformation and
examples of phase diagrams), diffusion mechanisms and usual causes
of failure in a given material. The third part is on application and
processing of specific material (metals, ceramics and polymer).
Introduction of electrical, magnetic and optical properties of materials
is also presented in the course. In general, this introductory materials
science and engineering course deals with the different material types
(i.e., metals, ceramics, polymers, composites), as well as the various
kinds of properties exhibited by these materials (i.e., mechanical,
electrical, magnetic, etc.) which intended to equip the students with
necessary knowledge on material science and engineering.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
Able to describe general properties, structure, processing and
performance of materials.
Able to identify the types of corrosion, explain the mechanism and
causes thus express the appropriate corrosion prevention.
66
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
Able to describe the mechanism of various failure modes and
predict the appropriate design principles to prevent in-service
failures.
Able to describe the properties of semiconductor materials from
the perspective of band structure, addition of impurities,
temperature dependence.
Able to define different classification of engineering materials.
Able to explain the electronic structure of individual atom as well
as inter-atomic bonding and crystal structure of solids.
Able to differentiate the types of imperfections that exist and the
role they play in affecting the behavior of materials.
Able to distinguish between steady state and non- steady state
diffusion.
Able to state how various mechanical properties are measured and
what these properties represent.
Able to interpret the phase diagram in design and phase
transformation with regards to various heat treatments.
Text book
Materials Science and Engineering: An Introduction, W.D.
Callister, Jr.,8th edition, Wiley, 2010.
Reference books
(i) The Science and Engineering of Materials, Donald R.
Askeland, Pradeep P. Phulé, Chapman & Hall, 5th edition,
Thomson Leaning, 2006, USA.
(ii) Foundations of Materials Science and Engineering, 4thEdition,
William F. Smith, William Smith, McGraw Hill, 2006, New
York.
(iii) Introduction to Materials Science for Engineers, 7th Edition,
James F. Shackelford, Prentice Hall, 2008, New Jersey.
EBB 155/2 - Engineering Materials Introduction Laboratory
Objective:
To give exposure of practical works that related to the basic principles of
material science.
Synopsis:
The course is an introductory course on experimental method related to
the basic principles of materials. It consists of ten set of different
experiments which the student has to carry out with the assistance of
lecturer and technical staff. Students are divided into small group and
hands-on experiments are performed. Students are required to record,
measure, calculate the result and finally write and submit a report at the
end of each session. Each experiment covers various aspects of
materials (i.e. metal, ceramics polymers and composites). Safety
aspects and regulations on conducting scientific experiments are also
briefed and taught.
67
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to identify different types of materials and its related
properties.
Able to differentiate the difference in atomic arrangement of atoms
in various materials.
Able to determine the relationship between the porosity and
density of materials.
Able to perform fluid viscosity of liquid.
Able to relate the properties of particle to the compaction.
Able to operate microscopic and analysis of microscopy technique.
Able to identify the material quantitatively and qualitatively using
X-ray diffraction (XRD) technique.
Able to perform and explain the galvanic of the cell.
Able to measure the particle size.
Able to identify the plasticity of clay.
Callister W. D., Materials Science and Engineering: An
Introduction , 6th. ed., New York: John Wiley, 2003.
Smith W. F., Principles of Materials Science and Engineering, 2nd.
ed., McGraw - Hill, 1990.
Abdullah M., Ahmad, S., Abu Talib, I., Sains Bahan, Jilid 2, DBP,
1993.
EBS 110/2 - Engineering Drawing
Objective:
To give basic knowledge in drawing concept applicable to engineering.
Synopsis:
This course emphasizes on basic engineering design and drawings
through manual method and by using CAD software. It covers basic
methodology for traditional and concurrent design as well as basic
engineering graphic principles such as drawing size, line styles, texts,
conventional symbols, orthographic and isometric projection, multiview drawings, dimensioning, section, part list and assembly and
production drawings as well as standards in engineering drawing.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
Able to apply the knowledge of basic engineering design and
graphic principle in engineering field
Able to transform ideas to drawings according to acceptable
standards.
Able to produce engineering drawings using CAD
Mohd Ramzan Mainal, Badri Abdul Ghani dan Yahya
Samian.2000. Lukisan Kejuruteraan Asas.Penerbit Universiti
Teknologi Malaysia. pp 225.
Giesecke, F.E., Mitchell,A., Spencer,H.C,Hill,I.L., Dygdon, J.T.,
and Novak, J.E.2003. Technical Drawing,Twelfth Edition.Prentice
Hall. pp 702.
68
EBB 160/3 - Physical Chemistry of Engineering Materials
Objective:
Students are expected to be able to understand the basic concept of
thermodynamics, kinetics and electrochemistry.
Synopsis:
This course covers topics on introduction to thermodynamics, kinetics
and electrochemistry. The concepts of mass and energy conservation
(1st law) and reversibility (2nd law) applied to closed and open (control
volume) systems. Thermochemistry, stoichiometry, chemical
equilibrium, reaction kinetics. Relations between state functions and
their derivatives. Total differentials, partial differentials and their
meaning. Introductory description of thermodynamic energy functions
(U, H, A and G), departure functions and thermodynamic reference
states. Kinetics of reaction-effects of reactant and product
concentration, determination order of reaction, effect of temperature on
reaction kinetics, activation energy, catalysis. Electrolytes,
conductance, electrode potentials, Galvanic cell, determination of emf
electrode potential, thermodynamics of electrochemical cell, Nersnt
equation , Electrolysis, Faraday’s Law.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to understand the basic concepts of thermodynamics, kinetics
and electrochemistry.
Able to understand the concept of energy and its various forms.
Able to understand and be able to use constitutive relationships
relating state variables.
Able to apply their knowledge of thermodynamics, kinetics and
electrochemistry to materials and related problems.
Azizan, A., and Kamarudin, H., Pengenalan Kimia Metalurgi,
USM Penang, 1999.
Lee, H., Chemical Thermodynamics For Metals and Materials,
Imperial College Press,London, 1999.
Gaskell, David R., Introduction to Thermodynamics of Materials,
Taylor & Francis Books,London, 2003
EAS 152/3 - Strength of Materials
Objective:
To equip students with basic knowledge about fundamental principles
that governs the strength and stiffness of deformable bodies.
Synopsis:
Tension, compression and shear, Axially loaded bars, Torsionally
loaded circular bars, Laterally loaded beams, Deflection, Stress and
strain analysis, Columns.
69
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Able to identify effect of axial, torsional and flexural loads on
stresses and deflection in deformable bodies(P1, A1).
Analyze stresses and deflection in deformable bodies under the
action of axial, torsional and flexural loads(C4, CTPS).
Evaluate the effect of axial, torsional and flexural loadings by
means of suitable diagrams and graphical means(A3, CTPS).
James M. Gere, Mechanics of Materials - 5th Edition,
Brooks/Cole, 2001.
Ferdinand P.Beer, E.Russell Johnston, Jr. and John
T.DeWolf,Mechanics of Materials, International Edition - 3rd
Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002.
William Nash, Strength of Materials - 4th Edition, Schaum’s
Outlines,McGraw-Hill, 1999
Russel C.Hibbeler, Mechanics of Materials – 4th edition, Prentice
Hall,1999.
EUM 114 Advanced Engineering Calculus
Objectives:
This course covers the concepts of linear algebra, Fourier series, partial
differential equation and vector calculus. This course will provide
students with a variety of engineering examples and applications based
on the above topics.
Synopsis:
Linear algebra:
Determinants, inverse matrix, Cramer’s rule, Gauss elimination, LU
(Doolittle and Crout), eigen value and vector eigen, system of linear
equation, numerical method for solving linear equation: Gause Seidel
and Jacobian.
Fourier series:
Dirichlet condition, Fourier series expansion, function defined over a
finite interval, half- range cosine and sine series.
Vector Calculus:
Introduction to vectors, vector differentiation, vector integration: line,
surface and volume, Green’s, Stoke’s and Gauss Div theorems.
Partial differential equation:
Method for solving the first and second order PDE, linear and non
linear PDE, wave, heat and Laplace equations.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
Able to define the concept of linear algebra, Fourier series, partial
differential equation and vector calculus.
Able to understand and use the concept of linear algebra, Fourier
series, partial differential equation and vector calculus.
70
References:
•
•
Able to use numerical methods for solving linear systems.
Able to apply the above concept for solving engineering problem.
1.
Glyn J., (2010).Modern Engineering Mathematics, 4th Edition
.Pearson
2.
Glyn, J., (2010).Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics, 4th
Edition .Pearson
3.
Ramana,B.V (2007) Higher Engineering Mathematics, 1st Edition.
Tata Mc Graw Hill
4.
Peter V.O’Neil
(2007). Advanced
Mathematics, 1st Edition .Thomson
5.
Ron Larson,Bruce H. Edwards (2009). Calculus, 9th Edition.
Brook ColeSteven
6.
Chapra, Raymond Canale (2009).Numerical
Engineers,6th Edition. Mc Graw Hill
7.
D.Vaughan Griffith,I.M Smith (2006). Numerical Method for
Engineers, 2nd Edition. Chapman and Hall
8.
Kreiyzig, E., (2010). Advanced Engineering Mathematics,10th
Edition.Wiley
9.
J.N.Sharma. (2007). Numerical Method for Engineers, 2nd
Edition. Alpha
Modern
Engineering
Method
for
10. Smith R. T. and Minton, R., (2008), Calculus, 3rd edition, Mc
Graw Hill.
EEU104/3 – Electrical Technology
Objective:
To study characteristics of various elements of electrical engineering
and analyze the electrical circuits and magnetic devices.
Synopsis:
Units, Definitions, Experimental Laws and Simple Circuits
System of units, charge, current, voltage, and power types of circuits
and elements. Ohm’s law, Kirchhoff’s laws, analysis of a single-loop
current, single node-pair circuit, resistance and source combination,
voltage and current division.
Circuit Analysis Techniques
Nodal and mesh analyses, linearity and superposition, source
transformations, Thevenin’s and Norton’s theorems.
Inductance and Capacitance
The V-I relations for inductor and capacitor, inductor and capacitor
combinations, duality, linearity and its consequences.
71
Source-free Transient Response of R-L and R-C Circuits
Simple R-L and R-C circuits, exponential response of source free R-L,
R-C circuits.
Response to Unit Step Forcing Function
Response of R-L and R_C circuits to unit step forcing functions.
Response to Sinusoidal Forcing Function
Characteristic of sinusoidal forcing functions, response of R-L and R-C
circuits to sinusoidal forcing functions.
Phasor Concept
The complex forcing function, the phasor, phasor relationships for R, L
and C, impedance and admittance
Average Power and RMS Values
Instantaneous power, average power, effective values of current and
voltage, apparent power and power factor, complex power.
Power System Circuits
An overview of single and three phase systems, wye and delta
configurations of three circuits, wye and delta transformations, and
power calculations in three phase systems.
Magnetic Circuits and Devices
Concept and laws of magnetism and analysis of transformers.
Introduction to electromechanical energy conversion, operation of
machines as generators and motors, power loss, efficiency and
operations at maximum efficiency.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
To understand basic quantity and unit definitions.
To understand the basic of electrical
To understand the principle of DC circuit analysis
To understand the principle of transient circuit analysis
To understand the principle of AC circuit analysis
To understand the principle of magnetic device, magnetic
circuit and transformer
References:
1.
2.
3.
Huges, “Electrical and Electronic Technology”, 10th ed,
Pearson Prentice Hill, 2008
Alexander and Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”,
3rd ed, Mc Graw Hill, 2007
Nilsson and Riedel, “Electric Circuits”, 8th ed, Pearson
Education, 2008
72
EML 101/2 – Engineering Practice
Objective:
To provide the exposure and basic knowledge of hands-on engineering
practices that includes the academic aspects as well as practical
trainings in learning and teaching of common engineering workshop
works and also to optimize the use of available resources in the
laboratory.
Synopsis:
Trainings are based on theoretical and practical concepts which consists
of manufacturing process; computer numerical control (CNC), lathe,
mill and thread machining, joint process, arc welding, gas welding and
MIG welding, metrology measurement, electric and electronic circuits,
and safety practice in laboratory and workshop.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Able to comply with the workshop procedures and safety
regulation.
Able to identify and to use common engineering tools in proper
and safe manners.
Able to produce engineering work-piece using the correct tools and
equipments within the time allocated.
Able to carry out accurate engineering measurement and label the
dimensions and tolerance.
Able to select the optimum tools, equipments and processes in
producing the work-piece.
Child, J.J., An Introduction to CNC Machining, Cassell
Computing, 1984.
Kalpakjan, S., Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, 3rd ed,
Addison Wesley, 1995.
Ibrahim Che Muda dan Ramudaram, N., Teknologi Bengkel
Mesin, 1995.
Ahmad Baharuddin Abdullah, Modul Kerja Amalan Kejuruteraan
(PPKM), 2005.
EBB 202/3 - Crystallography and Bonding in Solids
Objective:
To learn the basic symmetry in crystals and the development of space
groups - characterization of crystal symmetry. Bonds in solids, atom and
molecule structure and the application of X-ray diffraction are also
touched.
Synopsis:
The subject discuss about crystal symmetry including point and space
group symmetry presented and explained through stereographic
projection and crystal models. Bonding in Solids covers atomic models
and the general wave equation, Schrödinger equation for quantum
number (electronic level of electrons), and types of bonding in solids
73
and its contribution / correlation with materials properties. The
principle and application of X-Ray diffraction techniques for the
characterization of crystal materials.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Able to explain correlation between types of bonding / structure
and material properties.
Able to apply concept of symmetry in constructing stereographic
projection of crystal, symmetry elements, and point and space
group symmetry.
Able to comprehend the theory, and production of x-ray.
Able to interpret/analysis diffraction data of materials.
B.D. Cullity, and S.R. Stock, Elements of X-Ray Diffraction, 3rd
Ed., Prentice Hall, 2001.
C. Hammond, The Basics of the Crystallography and Diffraction,
2nd Ed., Oxford University Press, 2001.
E.J.W. Whittaker, Crystallography: An Introduction for Earth
Science (and other Solid State) Students, Pergamon Press, 1981.
F. Donald Bloss, Crystallography and Crystal Chemistry: An
introduction, Holt, Rinehart & Winston, Inc., 1971.
W. Borchardt-Ott, Crystallography 2nd edition, Springer-Verlag,
1995.
EBB 250/2 - Computer Methods for Engineers
Objective:
To give exposure about several vital computer techniques in engineering
- Visual Basic, Excel.
Synopsis:
The course covers the basic of programming related to engineering
environment. Visual Basic has been chosen as programming language
because of its easy to implement and its object oriented methods.
Students are also introduced to various concepts of programming logics,
types of data, decision making, procedural and advanced database
object. Fundamental of MySQL technique of implementation and data
linking are also covered.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
Able to explain the basic concept/principle in Visual Basic
programming.
Able to describe and apply the technology, types and
characteristics of structured programming.
Able to design and write a complete program under GUI(Graphical
User Interface) environment.
Able to assess a range of learning resources and to take
responsibility for own learning with appropriate support.
Able to explain and work effectively by the use of design program
to simplifies the work flow and data processing.
74
References:
1.
2.
3.
P.G McKeown, 2002, Learning to Program With Visual Basic (2nd
Ed.), John Wiley.
E. Newman, 1999, Programming with Microsoft Visual Basic 6.0:
An Object Oriented Approach, Thomas Publishing.
J. Hall, 1995, Teach Yourself Visual Basic, MIS Press. A range of
recent internet publications will be provided to cover new
techniques in programming.
EBB 236/3 - Materials Thermodynamic
Objective:
To learn thermodynamics concept and its application to material systems.
Synopsis:
This course will cover the basic knowledge, comprehension and
application of law of thermodynamic to understand the relationship
between the properties that matter exhibits as it changes its condition.
The first part includes review of thermodynamic concept, statistic
thermodynamic and solution. The second part covers the phase
equilibrium, thermodynamic of phase diagram, crystal defect, phase
transformation unary and heterogeneous system, solution, phase
equilibrium, surface and interface, defects in crystal, phase
transformation and energy of interfaces.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Able to understand general principle that is a basis for determining
internal condition of thermodynamic system at its equilibrium
state.
Able to interpret internal properties of materials and many
important
chemical
reaction
take
places
among
element/compounds dissolve in solution.
Able to understand the macroscopic thermodynamic properties of
materials, and to predict absolute values.
Able to relate thermodynamic properties behaviour at the surface
of materials.
Able to predict thermodynamic of phase stability of co-existing
elements/compounds under a given physical constrain.
Able to develop a thermodynamic description of the behaviour of
point defects in elemental crystal and binary compounds.
Robert T. DeHoff, Thermodynamic in materials science, Mc Graw
Hill, 1993.
Mac Geon Lee, Chemical thermodynamic for Metals and
Materials, Imperial College Press, 1999.
David V.Ragone, Thermodynamics of Materials, Volume I, John
Wiley & Sons, Inc.
David V.Ragone, Thermodynamics of Materials, Volume II, John
Wiley & Sons, Inc.
75
EBB 245/3 - Engineering Materials Characterization
Objective:
To give some introduction to materials characterisation methods in
theory and applications.
Synopsis:
This course is on materials characterization techniques from the
theoretical aspect, instrumentation and applications. It covers three
topics: (a) Microstructural Analysis (optical microscope, SEM, TEM
and SPM), (b) Thermal Analysis (TGA, DTA, DSC, DTMA and TMA)
and (c) Spectroscopy: phases and surface analysis (molecular
spectroscopy (infra red and Raman), atomic spectroscopy (absorption
and emission), x-ray techniques (XRF and XRD) and introduction to
surface analysis and ion spectroscopy (SIMS and Auger electron
spectroscopy).
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Able to comprehend the concept of materials characterization
including the theory, working principle and application.
Able to select and apply the suitable technique (s) for properties’
characterization of materials in any application.
Able to analyze the characterization results qualitatively and
quantitatively.
Able to correlate between the microstructure and chemical
composition to the material properties.
Able to determine materials based on the characterization results.
Braun, R.D., Introduction to Instrumental Analysis, McGraw Hill
1997.
Erwing, G.W., Instrumental Method of Chemical Analysis 5th
Edition, McGraw Hill International 1985.
Christian, G.D., Analytical Chemistry 5th Edition, John Wiley &
Sons 1994.
Cullity, B.D. and Stock, S.R., X-Ray Diffraction 3rd Edition,
Pearson Education International 2001.
Jenkins, R., X-Ray Fluorescence Spectrometry 2nd Edition, John
Wiley & Sons 1999.
Siblia, J.P., A Guide to Materials Characterization and Chemical
Analysis 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons 1999.
EUP 222/3 - Engineers in Society
Objective:
To provide knowledge on ethics, management, law and financial
accounting related to engineering industry and the related framework
necessary for the effective conduct to the society and industry.
Synopsis:
This course provides exposure to students the fundamentals principles
of engineering ethics such as code of engineering ethics and the
76
responsibility of a professional engineer, basic law covering
introduction to Malaysian Laws, engineering accounts and basic
introduction to management theory.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
References:
Introduce the fundamental theoretical principles related to
engineering ethics, basic law for engineers, engineering accounting
and basic management.
Practice the real understanding on the fundamental theoretical
principles related to engineering ethics, basic law for engineers,
engineering accounting and basic management.
Appreciate the importance of the fundamental theoretical
principles in actual construction industry.
1.
Abdul Aziz Hussin & Abdul Rashid Abdul Aziz, (2000), Aspek
Undang-undang Tort Dalam Projek Pembinaan, Pulau Pinang
Penerbit Universiti Sains Malaysia.
2. Akta Pendaftaran Jurutera dan Peraturan, 1967 (Pindaan
Sehingga 1998).
3. Boatright, J. R., (2000), ‘Ethics and The Conduct of Business’,
New Jersey, Prentice-Hall.
4. Dyson, J. R., (1999), ’Accounting for Non-Accounting Students,
London, Pitman Publishing.
5. Hairul Azhar Abdul Rashid, et. al., (2004), ‘Engineers in Society’,
Kuala Lumpur, McGraw Hill.
6. Harrison, W.T, & Horngren, C. T., (2001), ‘Financial Accounting’,
New Jersey, Prentice-Hall.
7. Jaafar Muhamad, (1999), ’Asas Pengurusan, Petaling Jaya, Fajar
Bakti.
8. Radford, J.D., (1998), ’The Engineer in Society’, London,
Macmillan.
9. Robbins, S.P., & Coulter, M, (2004), ‘Management’, New Jersey,
Prentice-Hall.
10. Shaik Mohd Noor Alam, (1998), ’Undang-undang Komersil
Malaysia’, Kuala Lumpur, Dewan Bahasa Pustaka.
11. Velasquez, M.G., (1998), ‘Business Ethics’, New Jersey, PrenticeHall.
12. Wu Min Aun, (2000), ‘Sistem Perundangan Malaysia’, Petaling
Jaya, Longman.
EBB 204/2 - Materials Characterization Laboratory
Objective:
To obtain experience through tests and the characterization of materials.
Synopsis:
The course is an introductory course on experimental method related to
the materials properties and materials testing methodology. It consists
of ten set of different experiments which the student has to carry out
77
with the assistance of lecturer and technical staff. Each experiment
covers various aspects of materials properties testing such as
mechanical, physical, corrosion and electrical conductivity. Students
are divided into small group and hands-on experiments are performed.
Students are required to record, analyze, discuss the result and finally
submit a report at the end of each session.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to identify properties of glasses
Able to perform and explain sheet resistance of Si
Able to describe the effect of slag attack on refractory materials
Able to elucidate corrosion behaviour of metal.
Able to recognize tensile properties of engineering materials.
Able to describe microstructure and hardness of arc welded mild
steel.
Able to evaluate hardness properties of materials.
Able to explain torsion and bending properties of materials.
Able to recognize creep and impact properties of materials.
Able to explain reversible thermal expansion of materials.
George E. Dieter, Mechanical Metallurgy; SI metric ed., McGraw
Hill, 1988.
Callister W. D., Materials Science and Engineering: An
Introduction, 6th. ed. New York, John Wiley, 2003.
James F. Shackelford, Introduction to Materials Science for
Engineers, 3rd. ed., Maxwell Macmillan Int. ed., 1992.
EBB 212/4 - Raw Materials and Structural Ceramics
Objective:
To introduce the basics related to raw materials that are used in the
contemporary and future ceramic industry/field. Besides that, the
construction technology and the nature of cement and concrete along
with heavy clay products are also touched.
Synopsis:
This course is the first course on ceramic engineering and deals with
two basic components, viz. ceramic raw materials and conventional
structural products.
Raw materials for all types of ceramics will be introduced. Ceramic raw
materials will be classified as powders derived from natural resources
and powders derived from chemical synthesis. The most important raw
materials from natural resources will be clays, including genesis of
clays, geological formation and various types of clays, such as kaolin,
ball clays, fireclays, brick clays, etc. Different uses of kaolin will be
highlighted in relation to the physical, chemical and mineralogical
characteristics. Also introduced are natural resources such as silica
sand, limestone, feldspars, etc. The uses of these materials on their own
or in combination in present day ceramic engineering products will be
78
highlighted, such as whitewares, glass, cement, etc. The various
chemical synthesis of ceramic powders will be introduced, such
precipitation, sol-gel, hydrothermal, pyrolysis and vapor depositions
methods. The effects of powder characteristics on the properties of final
products. Additives in synthesized ceramic powders such as binders.
Structural ceramics include structural clay products such as clay pipes,
roofing tiles, common and facing bricks, as well as cement and
concrete. Powder preparation inclusive of crushing, grinding and
mixing. Mechanisms of grinding, types grinding mills and media.
Effects of heat on ceramic products including drying and firing /
sintering. Agglomerates and aggregates. Types of cements and their
composition will be covered inclusive of the wet and methods for
producing Portland cement. Mineralogical phases in Portland cements
and their effects on properties such as hardening, strength and sulphate
resistance. Bogue calculation. Function of gypsum addition in Portland
cement. Other types of cement such as high alumina cement, white
cement, pozzolanic cement, etc. Concrete: components, additives, and
typical admixtures for engineering uses.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to identify and differentiate raw materials and structural
ceramic (natural and synthesized).
Able to distinguish the processing parameters for mixing and
milling.
Able to differentiate structural ceramic products.
Able to determine desire powder characteristics and different
methods to synthesize ceramic materials.
Able to distinguish major ceramic materials including their
processing and properties.
Able to apply knowledge of raw materials and methods in cement
and concrete preparations.
J.S Reed, Introduction To The Principles Of Ceramics Processing,
John Wiley & Son, (1988)
F.M. Lea, Chemistry of Cements and Concrete, 3rd ed., Chemical
Publ. New York, (1971)
D. Segal, Chemical Synthesis of Advanced Ceramics Materials,
Cambridge University Press (1991).
EBB 215/3 - Semiconductor Materials
Objective:
To introduce and expose the student to semiconductor materials
including their physical and chemical properties, and their applications
in semiconductor devices
79
Synopsis:
Course
Outcomes:
The course is divided into two parts. The first part (part I) is an
introduction of atomic model, bonding forces in solid, semiconductor
materials and the concept of energy band model in solids. Having
established the fundamental theory of crystals and some quantum
mechanics in Part I, the Part II takes a real semiconductor material as
an example and expand the above mentioned topics to deal with
semiconductor in equilibrium and non equilibrium, transport
phenomena in a semiconductor and the p-n junction which is the basic
building bock of semiconductor and optoelectronics devices.
•
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Able to identify the differences between semiconductor, conductor
and insulator and bonding forces involved.
Able to classify semiconductor materials according to their nature
of current carrier, crystal structure and chemical compositions.
Able to explain the concept of energy band structure.
Able to define the charge carrier behaviour by applying the
knowledge from the energy band diagram.
Able to elucidate the transport phenomena in a semiconductor and
to perform current transport calculations.
Able to apply the knowledge on charge carriers behaviour to the
activity in a depletion region when a p-n junction is formed and to
explain the mechanism of carrier transport in a simple diode.
Adir Bar-Lev, Semiconductors and Electronics Devices (2nd
Edition), Prentice Hall International (1984).
S.M. Sze, Semiconductor Devices, Physics and Technology, 2nd
Edition, John Wiley and Sons.
D. Neamen, Semiconductor Physics and Devices, 3rd Edition,
MacGraw Hill.
Anderson and Neamen, Fundamental of Semiconductor Devices,
McGraw Hill (2005).
M.S. Tyagi, Introduction Materials And Devices, John Wiley and
Sons.
Ben. G Streetman, Solid State Electronic Devices, 4th Edition,
Prentice Hall International.
EBB 220/3 - Engineering Polymers
Objective:
To introduce basic engineering concepts for polymer chemistry,
processing and production.
Synopsis:
This course covers topics on introduction to various polymers such as
thermoplastics, thermoset, elastomer, thermoplastic elastomer, and
polymer composites. The course also covers relationship between
structures, properties and application as engineering materials with
specific conditions. It also discusses the modifications of polymers,
processing, rheological properties and viscoelastic concepts. It also
80
covers the examples of commercially available polymeric materials for
instance thermoplastic and thermoset for general and engineering
applications.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Able to correlate intrinsic relationship between structure and
properties of polymeric materials.
Able to explain the basic principles of rheology, visco-elastic,
rubber elasticity and to encompass aspects of basic engineering for
polymer processing and production.
Able to explain the basic concepts of polymers modifications by
means of addition various additives and relate with degradation
properties.
Able to suggest type of polymer for specific application.
Able to apply a theoretical approach to explain various behaviour
of polymers such as crystallinity, viscoelasticity and tacticity,
rubber elasticity.
Able to differentiate between various type of polymerization and
its mechanisms in producing synthetic polymers.
J.F.Shackelford, Introduction to Materials Science For Engineers,
(sixth Edition), Pearson Prentice Hall, 2005
D.R. Askeland and P.P.Phule, The Science and Engineering of
Materials, (Fourth Edition) Thomson books/Cole, 2003.
R J Young and P A Lovell, Introduction to Polymers, Chapman &
Hall, 1992.
R J Crawford, Plastics Engineering, Pergamon Press, 1990.
D H Morton-Jones, Polymer Processing, Chapman & Hall, 1989.
N G McCrum, C P Buckley, C B Bucknall, Principles of Polymer
Engineering, Oxford/ University Press, 1988.
EBB 225/3 - Physical Metallurgy
Objective:
To learn physical metallurgy aspects; structure and physical nature of
materials, heat treatment etc.
Synopsis:
Physical Metallurgy - Crystal structure and properties of pure metal.
Solidification; Plastic Deformation Strengthening Mechanisms, solid
solution strengthening;
Deformation strengthening. Dispersion strengthening/hardening.
Order-disorder strengthening/hardening.
Recovery, Recrystallization and grain growth; iron-carbon diagram; TTT
diagram hardenability; heat treatment of steel, non-ferrous metals and
alloy.
81
Heat treatment for non-ferrous metals. Metals and alloys for high
temperature and low temperature applications. Cast iron and stainless
steel.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to relate properties to microstructure of metals during
solidification and annealing.
Able to describe
plastic deformation and strengthening
mechanisms of metals.
Able to explain phase transformation in steel during heat treatment
using iron phase diagram and TTT diagram.
Able to correlate microstructure and properties of metal to heat
treatment process.
Able to classify various types of non ferrous and ferrous metal.
Avner S. H., Introduction to Physical Metallurgy: An Introduction,
2nd. ed., New York : McGraw - Hill, 1974.
Porter D. A. and Easterling K. E., Phase Transformations in
Metals and Alloys, 2nd. ed., Chapman & Hall, 1992.
Kalpakjian S. & Schmid, S. R., Manufacturing Engineering and
Technology, 4th. ed., Prentice Hall, 2001.
EBB 325/2 - Microscopy Laboratory
Objective:
To give exposure on microstructure research and aspects related to
metallographic practices.
Synopsis:
The course is a practical course on techniques and applications of
microscopes in materials engineering study. It consists of ten set of
different experiments which the student has to carry out with the
assistance of lecturer and technical staff. Students are divided into
small group and hands-on experiments are performed. Students are
required to record, measure, calculate the result and finally write and
submit a report at the end of each session. Each experiment covers
various aspects of like samples preparation prior to analysis (etching),
the use of optical microscope and the use of scanning electron
microscope. The students are also invoked in the study of material
properties with respect to the microstructure of the materials. Safety
aspects and regulations on conducting scientific experiments are also
briefed and taught.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
Able to perform sample preparation and etching for metallographic
observation.
Able to determine the effect of heat treatment on different crystal
structures of metal.
82
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
4.
5.
6.
Able to understand the importance of metallography in processing
and heat treatment of metals.
Able to perform different methods for quantitative metallograph
Able to distinguish different heat treatment of steel.
Able to relate materials processing and properties of brass.
Able to differentiate the effect of heat treatment and oxidation.
Able to perform a test to observed the hardenability of steel.
Able to identify the effect of hardening processes on the brass.
Able to demonstrate the function of different types of microscope
for microstructural observation.
Materials Science and Engineering: An Introduction, W.D.
Callister, Jr., 6th edition, Wiley, 2003.
The Science and Engineering of Materials, Donald R. Askeland,
Pradeep P. Phulé, Chapman & Hall
3.
Foundations
of
Materials Science and Engineering, 3rd Edition, William F. Smith,
William Smith, McGraw Hill, 2004, New York.
F.L. Matthews, R.D. Rawlings, Composite Materials; Engineering
& Science, Chapman & Hall, 1994.
Kalpakjian, Serope, Manufacturing Engineering and Technology,
Adison Wesley Publishing Company USA, 1995
Metal Handbook, vol 5, Forging and Casting, 8th ed., American
Society for Metal, Ohio, USA.
EBB 332/4 - Whiteware and Glasses
Objective:
To introduce the manufacturing technique concepts of whitewares and
glasses as well as the usage and nature of the products.
Synopsis:
This course presents the essential knowledge on the production of
glasses and whitewares from raw materials to the final product.
Topics in glasses include different types of glass, different methods of
producing glasses, raw materials for glasses by melting, batching in
glasses by melting, forming processes and properties of glasses.
Topics in whitewares include: raw materials for whitewares, processing
of these raw materials into slip, plastic and semi-dry powder forms,
different shaping methods, drying and different firing methods, moulds
for casting (include their raw materials and process), glazes inclusive of
decoration, and finally properties of the final product.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Able to determine the production concepts in glassy and ceramic
materials.
Able to interpret the types of raw materials and their functions.
Able to classify the principles of the various fabrication methods.
Able to calculate of body, glaze and glass compositions.
83
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Able to differentiate properties of the ceramic and glass products
inclusive of product defects.
Able to develop group efforts and presentation skills through
monitored assignments.
G. Morey, The Properties of Glass, Reinhold Publishing
Corporation, USA (1954).
Glass Manufacturers’ Federation, Glass, Borax Consolidated Ltd.,
London (1965).
H. Rawson, Inorganic Glass-Forming Systems, Academic Press,
London (1967).
D. S. Oliver, The Use of Glass in Engineering, Engineering Design
Guides 05, Oxford University Press, UK (1975).
P. W. McMillan, Glass Ceramics, 2nd Edition, Academic Press,
UK (1979).
Engineering Materials : An Introduction, Unit 3-6, The Open
University Press, UK (1982).
A. Paul, Chemistry of Glasses, Chapman & Hall, London (1982).
H. R. Persson, Glass Technology - Manufacturing and Properties,
Cheong Moon Gak Publishing Co., Korea (1983).
H. Rawson, Properties and Applications of Glass, Series : Glass
Science & Technology 3, Elsevier, The Netherlands (1984).
M. Cable and J. M. Parker, High-Performance Glasses, Blackie &
Sons ltd., London (1992).
Radzali Othman & Ahmad Fauzi Mohd Noor, Sains Tembikar:
Bahan, Proses dan Hasilan; Terjemahan Buku :”Materials,
Process and Products” oleh A. Dinsdale Penerbit Universiti Sains
Malaysia (1993).
H. Fraser, Ceramic Faults and their remedies, A & C Black,
London (1986).
G.C Nelson, Ceramics: a Potter’s Handbook, CBS College, USA
(1984).
EBB 344/3 - Mechanical Metallurgy
Objective:
To introduce all the aspects related to the mechanical nature of metals.
Synopsis:
Elastic Behavior: plane stress, Mohr circle, tensor stress, stress intensity.
Theory of elasticity: True stress and true strain, criteria of yield.
Stress combination test. Relationship of plastic stress-strain.
Slip line theory. Principle of upper limit theory
Mechanical working of metal:
Survey of processes
Mechanic of metal working
Effect heat on strain rate of stress flow
Metallurgical structure
Frictions and lubricants
84
Residual stress
Mechanical Testing of metal tension, target, hardness, fatigues, creep
impacts.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to explain elastic and plastic behaviour in metals.
Able to solve response of metals to force using plane stress and
Mohr’s Circles.
Able to apply theory of plasticity in order to predict the onset of
yielding in ductile metals.
Able to explain and analyze the mechanism of fracture behavior.
Able to explain and analyze mechanical testing; tensile, fatigue,
creep, impact, hardness. ASTM standards.
Able to explain and analyze materials wear behavior.
Dieter G. E., Mechanical Metallurgy, SI Metric ed., McGraw Hill, 1988.
Norman E. Dowling, Mechanical Behaviour of Materials:
Engineering Methods for Deformation, Fracture and Fatigue, 2nd
ed., Prentice Hall, 1999.
Smith W. F., Principles of Materials Science and Engineering, 2nd.
ed., McGraw - Hill, 1990.
EUP 301/3 - Engineering Management
Objective:
To extend students’ knowledge and understanding of the direction and
operation of organization in areas of human resources management,
marketing management and engineering economics. This course is also
meant to develop students’ ability to provide analysis and commentary
to make decisions of work tasks in engineering activities.
Synopsis:
This course introduces the students of the basics of fundamentals of
theoretical principles of human resource management, marketing
management and engineering economics.
Course
Outcomes:
Students are
• Introduced the fundamental theoretical principles related to human
resources management, marketing management and engineering
economics.
• Able to analysis current economic environment to make effective
decision making.
• Able to appreciate the importance of the basics of fundamentals of
theoretical
principles
implementing
actual
engineering
management.
85
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Bayliss, J.S., (1999), Marketing For Engineers, Prentice-Hall.
Blythe, J., (2001), ‘Essentials of Marketing’, Essex, FinancialTimes Prentice Hall.
Egan, J., (2001), ‘Relationship Marketing’, New Jersey, PernticeHall.
Keat P. & Young, (2001), ‘Managerial Economics For Decision
Makers’, Macmillan.
Maimunah Aminuddin, (2000), ‘ Pengurusan Sumber Manusia’ ,
Shah Alam, Fajar Bakti.
Mondy, R.W., & Noe, R.M., (2003), ‘Human Resource
Management’, New Jersey, Perntice-Hall.
Sharifah Akmam Syed Zakaria, (2004), ‘Asas Pengurusan
Pemasaran Industri’, Kuala Lumpur, Prentice-Hall
Thuesen H. G. et al., (1997), ‘Ekonomi Kejuruteraan’
(Terjemahan) , Kuala Lumpur, Dewan Bahasa & Pustaka.
EBB300/3 : Engineering Statistics
Objective:
Strengthening knowledge and skills in mathematical modeling to
provide students in understanding engineering mathematics concepts
then able to formulate and solve engineering problems.
Synopsis:
This course covers the topics: The role of experimental design in
engineering fundamentals and applications of experimental design such
as sampling
distributions, data analysis, factorial design,
regression and correlation. Provide an understanding of the concept of
complex numbers. Provides
approaches to problem solving and
mathematical modeling rules.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
References:
Identified the factors of experimental design and links this
knowledge in the field of engineering applications
Recognizing patterns and procedures in experimental design
including defining problems, identifying the parameters of the
dependent and independent and analyze data
Applying the principles of regression and correlation of
engineering problems
Analyzing the problems of modeling, engineering and construction
of the factors in a mathematical modeling in engineering
Formulate engineering problems and the solution in the form of
mathematical modeling
1. Douglas C. Montgomery, (2009), Design and Analysis of
Experiments, Wiley, 7th Edition.
2. Diran Basmadjian, Ramin Farnood , (2006), The Art of Modeling
in Science and Engineering with Mathematica, Second Edition,
Chapman & Hall/CRC
86
3. Douglas C. Montgomery, Scott M. Kowalski, (2010), Design and
Analysis of Experiments: MINITAB Companion, Wiley, 7th edition.
4. Edward B. Magrab, Shapour Azarm, Balakumar Balachandran,
James Duncan, Keith Herold,
Gregory
Walsh,(2011),
An
Engineers Guide to Matlab, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall.
5. Kreiyzig, E., (2010). Advanced Engineering Mathematics,10th
Edition, Wiley
6. Ramana,B.V., (2007) Higher Engineering Mathematics, 1st Edition,
Tata Mc Graw Hill.
EBB 333/3 - Transport Processes
Objective:
To learn about fluid dynamics (viscosity characters of fluid),
transportation energy, energy equations and mass transportation.
Synopsis:
Momentum transportation:
Hydrostatic: moving fluids, types of flows, mass conservation, energy
and momentum, measurement of pressure and velocity, losses in flows,
viscosity, boundary layer theory. Dimension analysis and similarity.
Heat transfer; Heat conduction in cylinders and spheres, heat transfer
constant; heat transfer through convection, natural and forced convection;
thermal radiation; heat transfer.
Mass transportation:
Diffusion in solid, Fick's Law, Diffusion in steady and non-steady state,
short circuit diffusion, diffusion in fluid.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to explain the concepts, descriptions of transport mechanisms
and means of analytically describing the transport processes in
obtaining rates of heat, mass and momentum transfer.
Able to analysis of differential element to obtain the relevant
governing differential equations in deriving the expressions for
temperature, concentration and velocity distributions.
Able to apply the fundamental concept of convective transport, and
to use dimensional analysis in dealing with it.
Able to derive and solve the partial differential equations for the
unsteady-state energy, mass, and momentum transfer and to apply
the dimensionless variables in obtaining the solution.
Gaskell D.R., Transport Phenomena in Materials Engineering,
MacMillan, 1992.
Fahien R.W., Fundamentals of Transport Phenomena, Mc Graw
Hill, 1983.
Bird R.B., Stewart W.E. & Lightfoot E.N., Transport Phenomena
2nd John Wiley, 2002.
87
EBB 323/3 - Semiconductor Fabrication Technology
Objective:
To introduce about silicon wafer production technology and integrated
circuits.
Synopsis:
This course focuses on the major process technologies used in the
fabrication of integrated circuits (ICs) and other semiconductor devices.
Each lecture topic covers important scientific aspects of silicon wafer
processing steps. Topics include: crystal growth and wafer preparation,
crystal purification techniques, contamination control, oxidation,
diffusion, ion implantation, lithography, thin film deposition
technology, etching, metallization, process integration, electronic
packaging and yield.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Able to explain contamination control in semiconductor industries.
Able to describe a process of developing semiconductor devices
and integrated circuits.
Able to describe and explain types of operations sequence in a
semiconductor device and integrated circuit fabrication process.
Able to distinguish, compare, and justify different types of
techniques used in different process steps.
Able to illustrate a simple semiconductor-device fabrication
process flow.
S. A. Campbell, The Science and Engineering of Microelectronic
Fabrication, Oxford, New York, 1996.
G.S. May and S.M. Sze, Fundamentals of Semiconductor
Fabrication, Wiley, New Jersey, 2004.
J.D. Plummer, M.D. Deal, and P.B. Griffin, Silicon VLSI
Technology: Fundamentals, Practice, and Modeling, Prentice Hall,
New Jersey, 2000.
P.V. Zant, Microchip Fabrication: A Practical Guide to
Semiconductor Processing, McGraw-Hill, New York, 2000.
W.D. Brown, Advanced Electronic Packaging, IEEE Press, New
York, 1999.
EBS 238/3 - Fluid Mechanics
Objective:
To introduce the concept, analysis and the fluid in static and dynamic
condition.
Synopsis:
This course introduce the concept, analysis and properties of fluids and
gas at static and dynamic condition and their application in engineering
environment.
Course
Outcomes:
•
Able to understand of the basic principals of fluid mechanics.
88
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to to apply the above principals in order to perform
calculations and solve problems relating to theory.
Able to understand of the principals of fluid flow, in particular
laminar and turbulent flow regimes.
Able to understand dimensional analysis and be able to use
dimensionless ratios to form relationships between fluid properties
after experimentation.
Able to understand the principals of fluid machinery, in particular
pumps and hydraulic circuits and be able to design simple
machinery systems.
Potter, M.C., and Wiggert, D.C.“ Mechanics of Fulids”
Brooks/Cole. Third Edition.
Bruce, R.M., “ Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics” John Wiley &
Sons.
White, F.M., “Fluid Mechanics” McGraw-Hill. Fifth Edition.
EBB 316/3 - Corrosion and Degradation
Objective:
To learn about metal corrosion and material degradation, types of
corrosion, theory and control as well as protection against corrosion.
Synopsis:
The course is intended to introduce the subject of corrosion of metals
and degradation of other classes of materials at the undergraduate level.
The bulk of course dwells into the aspects of corrosion of metals and
their prevention. Only limited coverage given to the degradation of nonmetallic materials.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
Able to classify theory of corrosion related to materials
Able to differentiate and explain different type of corrosions
Able to classify corrosion measurement for different materials and
method
Able to explain corrosion tests according to international
standards, analyze and interpret data resulted from corrosion tests
and measurements
Able to comprehend the concepts of corrosion prevention, apply
and design the corrosion protection techniques for controlling the
corosion of metal structures
Able to identify and diagnose cause of materials failure and
degradation especially due to corrosion and also to recommend
remedies for corrosion prevention/control
Ahmad, Zaki, Principle of Corrosion Engineering and Corrosion
Control, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2006
Roberge, P.R., Handbook of Corrosion Engineering, 1st Ed, Mc
Graw Hill, 2000.
89
3.
4.
5.
D.A., Jones Principles and Prevention of Corrosion, 2nd Ed,
Maxwell Macmillan Int. Editions, 1992.
Fontana, M.G. & Green, N.D., Corrosion Engineering, 3rd Ed.,
McGraw-Hill, 1986.
Wranglen, Gosta, Introduction to Corrosion and Protection of
Metals, Chapman & Hall, 1985.
EBB 317/2 - Materials Processing Laboratory
Objective:
To give hands on practice related to the processing of engineering
materials.
Synopsis:
The course is an introductory course on experimental method related to
the basic principles of materials processing. It consists of ten set of
different experiments which the student has to carry out with the
assistance of lecturer and technical staff. Students are divided into small
group and hands-on experiments are performed. Students are required
to record, measure, calculate the result and finally write and submit a
report at the end of each session. Each experiment covers various
aspects of materials processing (i.e. metal, ceramics polymers and
composites). Safety aspects and regulations on conducting scientific
experiments are also briefed and taught.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
4.
5.
To study the characteristics of slip casting curve and flow property.
To prepare and investigate polymer properties.
To prepare and experience ceramic processing (Creating).
To study the process and different parameter effect on powder
compaction.
To perform and observe the glazing and decoration.
To prepare sand mould and perform the melting metal casting.
To examine the welding behavior.
To introduce the cathodic protection.
To study plastic processing and characterized the plastic film.
To build and test microlectronic circuit.
Materials Science and Engineering: An Introduction, W.D.
Callister, Jr., 6th edition, Wiley, 2003.
The Science and Engineering of Materials, Donald R. Askeland,
Pradeep P. Phulé, Chapman & Hall. 3.
Foundations
of
Materials Science and Engineering, 3rd Edition, William F. Smith,
William Smith, McGraw Hill, 2004, New York.
F.L. Matthews, R.D. Rawlings, Composite Materials; Engineering
& Science, Chapman & Hall, 1994.
Allen Dinsdale: Terjemahan oleh Ahmad Fauzi Mohd Noor, Sains
Tembikar: Bahan, Proses, dan Hasilan, Universiti Sains Malaysia.
90
6.
7.
Kalpakjian, Serope, Manufacturing Engineering and Technology,
Adison Wesley Publishing Company USA, 1995
Metal Handbook, vol 5, Forging and Casting, 8th ed., American
Society for Metal, Ohio, USA.
EBB 337/3 - Advanced Material and Composites
Objective:
To introduce the manufacturing process, nature and usage of advanced
materials and composites.
Synopsis:
This course offers further understanding on the fabrication, properties
and applications of various advanced composite materials. Typical
topics covered include ceramic engineering materials, advanced metal
and alloys, speciality polymers, introduction to composite materials,
composite materials based on matrix (MMC, PMC, CMC), failure
mechanism and application and design of the composites.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to explain the theory of isostress, isostrain and wettability
concept in composite materials.
Able to justify and suggest different types of polymer matrix
composites (PMC) and processing for specific applications.
Able to explain suitable fabrication technique of metal and ceramic
matrix composites for specific application.
Able to relate the microstructure and properties of metal and
ceramic matrix composites to processing parameters.
Able to justify types of advanced materials for specific function
and biomedical application.
Able to formulate an advanced materials for alloying process and
inter metallic application.
R.F. Gibson, Principles of Composite Materials Mechanics,
McGraw Hill, Inc, 1994.
F.L. Matthews, R.D. Rawlings, Composite Materials; Engineering
& Science, Chapman & Hall, 1994.
H.G. Allen, Introduction to Sandwich Construction, 1st Edition,
Pergamon Press, 1969.
EBB 342/3 - Quality Control and Management
Objective:
To develop students knowledge on quality concepts, control,
improvement, and management.
Synopsis:
This course presents knowledge and demonstrates skills necessary to
structure, manage, maintain, and improve quality of an organization.
Topics include: Introduction to quality, management aspects of quality,
91
statistical methods to control and improve quality, and concept of
reliability.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Able to describe and apply the philosophies of quality
management.
Able to apply various effective statistical methods to monitor,
control and improve quality.
Able to explain the concept of reliability of a product.
D.H. Besterfield, Quality Control, 7th Edn, Prentice Hall, New
Jersey, 2004.
H.M. Wadsworth, K.S. Stephens, and A.B. Godfrey, Modern
Methods for Quality Control and Improvement, Wiley, New York,
2002.
D.C. Montgomery, Introduction to Statistical Quality Control, 5th
Edn, Wiley, New York, 2005.
H.S. Gitlow, A.J. Oppenheim, R. Oppenheim, and D.M. Levine,
Quality Management, 3rd Ed., McGraw-Hill, Singapore, 2005.
EBS 323/3 Pyrometallurgy
Objective :
To know the general principles and different techniques of metals
extraction and refining from ores at high temperatures for both ferrous
and non-ferrous metals.
Synopsis :
This course is a general introduction to pyrometallurgy. It covers the
basic principles and actual industrial practice of extraction and refining
of iron, steel, and other important non-ferrous metals. The topics
covered are: thermodynamic principles, Ellingham diagram, blast
furnace iron making including the physicochemical reactions, direct
reduction processes, principles of steel making, major reactions and
refining of steel, principles and practice of clean steel making, major
process steps in non-ferrous metal extraction, roasting, matte smelting,
vapour metallurgy, refining of non-ferrous metals, industrial practice
for common non-ferrous metals.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
Able to analyse the available processes critically, including the
environmental effects.
Able to differentiate options to extract metals from their minerals.
Able to compare processes to achieve the maximum benefit.
Able to examine the environmental, economical and energy related
issues of the available processes.
Able to discriminate the potentials of new acquired processes in
metals extraction
92
EBB 339/3 - Nanomaterials
Objective:
To give exposure on nanomaterials, fabrication method, properties and
application of nanomaterials.
Synopsis:
The main aim of this course is to equip students with knowledge on
nanomaterials especially on the properties of materials in nanoscale,
technique of fabrications, characterisations and applications of
nanomaterials in various types of industries: electronics, optics,
biotechnology, chemicals and other related engineering industries.
Different types of nanomaterials will be introduced: metal, ceramics,
semiconductors, carbon based material, composite and polymer at
different dimensions: 0, 1 and 2 dimensions. Societal impact of
nanomaterials will also be discussed.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Able to distinguish and to explain on the unique and novel
properties of nanomaterials.
Able to explain on the various synthesis processes and the methods
of characterisations of nanomaterials.
Able to identify the importance of nanomaterials in various
industries.
Able to discuss on the impact of nanomaterials to the society and
the environment.
Guozhong Cao, Nanostructures & Nanomaterials; Synthesis,
Properties & Applications, 2004, Imperial College Press.
Gabor L. Honyak, Joydeep Dutta, Harry F. Tibbals, Anil K. Rao,
Introduction to Nanoscience, 2008, CRC Press.
Gabor L. Honyak, John J. Moore , Harry F. Tibbals, Joydeep
Dutta, Fundamentals of Nanotechnology, 2009, CRC Press.
Rubahn Horst Gunther, Basics of Nanotechnology. 3rd Ed. 2008,
Weinheim: Wiley-VCH.
Kulkarni, Sulabha K. Nanotechnology : Principles and Practice,
2007, New Delhi: Capital Publishing Company.
Boucher, Patrick M. Nanotechnology : Legal Aspects, 2008, Boca
Raton, FL: CRC Press.
Edward L. Wolf , Nanophysics and Nanotechnology : An
Introduction to Modern Concepts in Nanoscience, 2006,
Weinheim: Wiley-VCH.
EBB 338/3 - Process Control
Objective:
To introduce the basic concept of process control system.
Synopsis:
This course the structure of feedback control theory from the basic
mathematics to a variety of design applications. The design of an over-
93
all process control system requires a good theoretical understanding of
stability, the dynamic characteristics of controllers and general processcontrol loop dynamic characteristics.
The course discusses
terminology, concepts, principles, procedures and computations used in
the design activity to select, analyze, specify and maintain all parts of
the control system.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to apply the Laplace transform techniques as a mathematical
tool to model simple physical processes.
Able to explain elements in a block diagram of a feedback control
system.
Able to explain and state the importance of PID as a mode of
control.
Able to analyze the system stability by root locus and Bode plot.
Able to explain control systems adopted at industry.
Nise N. S., Control Systems Engineering, 5th edition, John Wiley
and sons, 2008
Seborg D.E. , Edgar T.F. and Mellichamp D.A, Process dynamics
and control, 2nd ed., John Wiley and sons, 2004.
Marlin T.E., Process Control – designing processes and control
systems for dynamic performance, 2nd ed, Mc GrawHill,
Singapore 2000.
EBB 398/3 - Occupational Safety and Health
Objective:
To give exposure to students about the health and safety requirement in
industry.
Synopsis:
Introduction to holistic and global occupational safety and health (OSH)
engineering concepts towards efficient industrial development,
significance of occupational safety and health in quality assurance,
complemented by professional and ethical responsibilities towards
safety in the industry. Major course components towards competence
in occupational safety and health engineering include importance of
OSH in national development, OSH legislation, benefits of OSH
training and professionalism, OSH management policies and protocols,
OSH performance monitoring, OSH assessment and audit techniques,
hazard identification, risk assessment and implementation of safe
worksite practices.
Course
Outcomes:
•
Able to determine the various factors affecting the selection of
appropriate occupational safety and health (OSH) concepts and
techniques.
94
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to formulate, evaluate and design an effective occupational
safety and health (OSH) techniques towards efficient industrial
development at worksites in the public and industrial sectors.
Able to function as a multi-discipline team, complemented with
effective communication skills, to identify, apply and describe the
application of occupational safety and health (OSH) engineering
knowledge towards effective industrial development worldwide.
Kelloway, E.K., Francis, L. and Montgomery. Management of
Occupational Health and Safety, Canada: Thomson-Nelson, 2006
Goetsch, D.L., Occupational Safety and Health, New Jersey:
Pearson-Prentice Hall, 2005.
Long, G., Goh, E.K.H. and Muhd M.N., Smart Partnerships,
Malaysia: Malaysia Quarries Association-IQM-MCM, 2005.
EBB 350/5 - Industrial Training
Objective:
Course
Outcomes:
A ten weeks industrial training during long vacation i.e. after the
second semester final examination (third year level). Students will get
their placement at various industrial sectors related to materials
engineering. They should experience the real exposure as an engineer
in this field. Students will be given training on various aspects such as
analysis, design, management, quality control and economy, which
related to their career as a materials engineer. This is a compulsory
training.
•
•
Able to practice the responsibility of becoming an engineer in the
profession of engineering.
Able to instill communication skill in engineering which include
daily interaction with working environment and technical writing.
EBB 405/3 - Failure Analysis and Non Destructive Testing
Objective:
To introduce the failure analysis technique to solve industrial and
industry product problems as well as NDT techniques.
Synopsis:
Increasingly, the industry applies non-destructive testing as an
economic tool to establish the condition and integrity of the
engineering components. The course covers the identification and
analyzes the premature failure of an engineering component in carrying
out its job. Origin of Failure, or multiple origins are out line by means
of; Location of contributing stress concentrators, Presence of relevant
contaminants on the fracture, e.g., temper color, scale, paint, Direction
of crack propagation and sequence of failure, Failure mode and
mechanism, Orientation and magnitude of stresses, imperfections
contribution to the failure and Sizes and other important physical data.
95
Not only faulty manufacturing processes are the reasons for
discontinuities in an industrial product but also due the environmental
and loading condition during service, lab testing in coloration with FA
is introduced. Non destructive testing NDT methods can be used to
detect discontinuities in industrial products without affecting the
service performance of the product in any way. Therefore, The most
important NDT techniques that discussed in detail are: Visual
Inspection (VI), Liquid penetrant testing (PT), Magnetic particle testing
(MT), Eddy Current testing (ET), Ultrasonic Testing (UT) and
Radiographic testing (RT). Writing a Failure Analysis Technical report
is also introduced.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to compare the application of visual inspection in NDT.
Able to explain and apply the magnetic particle and Ultrasonic
testing in NDT.
Able to select various type of liquid penetrant methods for specific
application.
Able to explain the radiography method use in NDT.
Able to compare various types of Eddy Curent NDT techniques
use in engineering applications.
Able to analyse different failure analysis techniques.
Metals Handbook, 8th ed., Vol 10 - Failure Analysis, ASM
International, Ohio, USA.
Metals Handbook, 8th ed., Vol 11 - Non-Destructive Testing, ASM
International, Ohio, USA.
Heinz P. Block & Find K.G., Machinery Failure Analysis and
Trouble Shooting, Gleiter Gulf Publishing Company Houston, TX,
1983.
EBB 441/3 - Applied Metallurgy
Objective:
To expose students to pouring technology, surface engineering, metal
manufacturing process (production) welding and machinery.
Synopsis:
Introduction to metallurgical principle for manufacturing of metal
components/products and to investigate the factors that influence the
efficiencies of manufacturing and services.
Castings
Mechanical working of metals and alloy.
Hot and cold working processes in forging, extrusion, rolling, wire and
rod drawing stress flow in deformation. Requirement of forces and
power in designing of dai and defects that occurs in bulk deformation
process. Working processes of sheet metal.
Powder metallurgy.
96
Welding and other joining process (gas welding, arc welding, laser
welding and electron beam).
Machining processes:
Principle and technique of metal discharged (turning, milling, bearing,
matching, EDM, ECM and others).
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to evaluate influence of processing parameters on materials
structure, behavior or properties, and performance.
Able to calculate the parameters needed in manufacturing of
product (for example, force and power required, velocity of molten
flow, solidification time, etc).
Able to do trouble shooting of defect or problem arises in
manufacturing of product.
Able to justify choice of process(s) based on design, cost, product
requirement / specification, and other related factors.
Able to explain some typical design considerations for each
process.
Kalpakjian S. & Schmid S.R., Manufacturing Engineering and
Technology, 4th ed., Prentice Hall Int. 2001.
Higgins R.A., Engineering Metallurgy : Part Two – Metallurgical
Process Technology, 5th ed., London : Hodden & Stoughton, 1983.
Metal Handbook, American Society for Metals, Ohio.
EBB 443/4 - Technical Ceramics
Objective:
To expose students to the important aspects in advanced ceramic
technology. Also to provide sufficient knowledge about material
characteristics, processing, selection and the properties of advanced
ceramic in technology applications.
Synopsis:
This course covers topics on types and mechanisms of sintering in
advanced ceramics. The course also covers processing, properties and
characterization/testing methods in refractories and thermal insulators,
electroceramics, high strength and high toughness structural ceramics.
It also discusses toughnening mechanism in the structural materials.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Able to distinguish and analyze the sintering mechanisms in
ceramic processing.
Able to differentiate the types and properties of ceramic refractory
to be use ceramic industry.
Able to relate the types and properties of advanced ceramic
materials.
Able to propose different types of advanced ceramic materials for
different applications.
97
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Able to justify different types and properties of electroceramics.
Able to combine knowledge to formulate new Functional ceramic
materials.
Davidge R. W., Mechanical Behaviour of Ceramics,
Cambridge University Press, 1980.
Saito S., Fine Ceramics, John Wiley & Son, 1987.
Mc Colm I. J. & Clark N. J., High Performance Ceramics,
Blackie & Sons (London), 1988.
Moulson A.J. and Herbert J.M., Electroceramics: Materials,
Properties and Applications, 2nd Edition, John Wiley and
Sons, 2003.
EBB 424/3 - Semiconductor Devices and Opto-Electronics
Objective:
To introduce semiconductor devices like dipolar junction transistors
(BTT), FET etc. Basic principles of laser and optoelectric devices such as
solar cells and photoreceptors are also contained in this course.
Synopsis:
This course divided to two major topics are semiconductor devices and
optoelectronics. The semiconductor devices part covers topic on bipolar
junction transistors (BJT), metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) capacitor,
field effect transistor (FET), metal oxide semiconductor field effect
transistor (MOSFET), and the latest technology of single-electron
transistor (SET). However, part of optoelectronics including light
emitting diode (LED), laser, photodiode, photodetector, and
photovoltaic materials and device configuration.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to analyze and compare a bipolar junction transistor and field
effect transistor using I-V and C-V characteristics.
Able to design and analyze a metal oxide semiconductor field
effect transistor devices.
Able to describe the principle of operation and fabrication of
nanoelectronic devices such as single-electron transistors.
Able to describe the principle of operation and materials selection
for common optoelectronic devices (LED, LASER, photodiode,
photodetector and photovoltaic).
Able to design and develope a simple photovoltaic (solar cell)
device.
Donald A. Neamen, An Introduction to Semiconductor Devices,
McGraw-Hill, 2006.
Betty L. Anderson and Richard L. Anderson, Fundamentals of
Semiconductor Devices, McGraw-Hill, 2005.
W. R. Fahrner (Ed.), Nanotechnology and Nanoelectronics,
Springer-Verlag, 2005.
98
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
K. Goser, P. Glosekotter, Jan Dien, Nanoelectronic and
Nanosystems: From Transistor to Molecular and Quantum
Devices, Springer, 2004.
Joachim Piprek, Semiconductor Optoelectronic Devices, Academic
Press, 2003.
S. M. Sze, Semiconductor Devices Physics and Technology, John
Wiley and Sons, 2002.
D. K. Ferry and J. P. Bird, Electronic Materials and Devices,
Academic Press, 2001.
J. Singh, Semiconductor Devices Basic Principles, John Wiley and
Sons, 2001.
S. O. Kasap, Optoelectronics and Photonics: Principles and
Practices, Prentice-Hall, 2001.
EBB 427/3 - Technology and Application of Engineering Polymer
Objective:
To give exposure on the technology and application of polymer in the
engineering field.
Synopsis:
This course covers topics on technology and applications of various
polymers in engineering applications. The course covers the properties
and the processing techniques for three types of polymeric materials such
as thermoset, thermoplastics and elastomer. It also covers the examples
of new polymeric materials and commercially available polymeric
materials, for instance thermoplastic and thermoset for general and
engineering applications.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Able to predict structure, properties and applications of commodity
and engineering thermoplastic.
Able to distinguish different types of processing techniques used in
fabrication of thermoplastic and elastomeric materials.
Able to propose a suitable method for plastic solid waste disposal.
Able to evaluate the fundamental
mechanism involve in
thermoset materials.
Able to justify the structure and properties of commercial types of
thermosetting materials.
Able to propose a suitable thermoset materials for specific
applications.
R J Young and P A Lovell, Introduction to Polymers, Chapman &
Hall, 1992.
R J Crawford, Plastics Engineering, Pergamon Press, 1990.
D H Morton-Jones, Polymer Processing, Chapman & Hall, 1989.
N G McCrum, C P Buckley, C B Bucknall, Principles of Polymer
Engineering, Oxford/ University Press, 1988.
99
5.
6.
An Introduction to Rubber Technology, Andrew Ciesielski, Rapra
Technology Ltd,1999.
Rubber Technology Handbook, Werner Hofmann, Hanser
Publisher, 1989.
EBB 407 – Final Year Research Project
Objective:
To give exposure in conducting scientific research projects.
Synopsis:
This course has been offered for 2 semesters. It offers further
understanding on selected topic in Materials Engineering. Each student
is given a title for an individual research project in the first semester.
Students are required to carry out literature study, analysis of previous
work, research experimental design and prepare a proposal in the first
semester. In the second semester, the students are required to carry out
experimental work, collecting data, discussion, dissertation writing and
oral presentation. The dissertation will be examined by an examiner. In
the oral presentation, the student is expected to defend his/her finding
in front of a panel of examiners.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
Able to explain the background of the topics of research given or
proposed.
Able to identify the references, tools or instrument required to
undertake the research.
Able to create innovativeness of the students in undertaking
problems faced in research.
Able to select the appropriate format in writing a research report.
Able to analyse the findings and its usefulness related to materials
engineering or general engineering.
References:
1.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The Science and Engineering of Materials, Donald R. Askeland,
Pradeep P. Phulé, Chapman & HallFoundations of
2.
Materials Science and Engineering, 3rd Edition, William F.
Smith, William Smith, McGraw Hill, 2004, New York.
F.L. Matthews, R.D. Rawlings, Composite Materials; Engineering
& Science, Chapman & Hall, 1994.
Adir Bar-Lev, Semiconductors and Electronics Devices (2nd
Edition), Prentice Hall International,
S.M. Sze, Semiconductor Devices, Physics and Technology, 2nd
Edition, John Wiley and Sons
D. Neamen, Semiconductor Physics and Devices, 3rd Edition,
MacGraw Hill
Anderson and Anderson, Fundamental of Semiconductor Devices,
McGraw Hill
M.S. Tyagi, Introduction Materials And Devices, John Wiley and
Sons
100
9.
Ben. G Streetman, Solid State Electronic Devices, 4th Edition,
Prentice Hall International
EBB 408/3 - Materials Selection and Design
Objective:
To introduce the procedures of material selection in engineering design
activities.
Synopsis:
This course integrates all types of materials covered in the preceding
semesters of the programme in Materials Engineering, viz. ceramics,
metals, polymers and composites.
The various classes and properties of these materials will be reviewed.
The various primary and secondary processing techniques will be
summarized.
Engineering design and the role of materials selection in any
engineering design process will be focused upon. Various materials
selection methodologies will be covered with an emphasis on the Ashby
method using material properties and processing charts. Ultimately, the
use of computers and specialized software will be incorporated into this
engineering skill development.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Able to appraise the inter-related factors in engineering design
including aesthetics, environmental and energy impact.
Able to justify the selection of materials for a specific engineering
function.
Able to analyse the suitability of a particular processing method for
a specific selected material and design activity using data, charts
and software.
Able to analyse parameters involved in selection process by
calculation & property chart.
Able to evaluate the role of material selection at various stages of
engineering design.
M.F. Ashby, Materials Selection in Mechanical Design, Pergamon
Press, England (1992).
M.M. Farag, Selection of Materials and Manufacturing Processes
for Engineering Design, Prentice Hall, UK (1989).
M.M. Farag, Materials Selection for Engineering Design, Prentice
Hall, UEurope (1997).
F.A.A. Crane and J.A. Charles, Selection and Use of Engineering
Materials, Butterworths, England (1984).
K.G. Budinski, Engineering Materials: Properties and Selection,
Prentice Hall, USA (1989).
101
6.
7.
M.F. Ashby and D.R.H. Jones, Engineering Materials: An
Introduction to their Properties and Applications, Pergamon, UK
(1980).
Radzali Othman, Bahan Kejuruteraan: Pengenalan Sifat dan
Kegunaan - Terjemahan, Penerbit USM (1996).
EBB 409/3 - Fluid Power and Turbo Machinery
Objective:
To introduce the hydraulic system and turbo machine techniques.
Synopsis:
This course makes an attempt in the first-half of the semester to relate
the basic theory of hydraulics and pneumatics to approved practice of
fluid power system in transferring power and accomplishing work. In
the second-half of the semester, the course provides a brief introduction
to turbomachinery by relating the moment-of-momentum principle
along with the application of turbines to supply or extract energy from
flowing fluid.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to describe the basic theory of hydraulics and pneumatics and
identify the limitations.
Able to establish the variations of pressure & calculate the forces
and pressures on plane and curved surfaces in fluids at rest.
Able to calculate pressure drop in a circuit plumbing to establish
fluid horsepower loss.
Able to identify and describe the physical properties of the fluid of
interest.
Able to analyse head-discharge performance curve in pump
application and design.
Able to determine the pump efficiency and net positive suction
head.
Sullivan, J.A., Fluid Power, Theory and Applications , 2nd ed.,
Reston Publ. Co., 1982.
Turtin, R.R., Prinsip Mesin Turbo , Percetakan Dewan Bahasa,
K.L., 1990.
Potter, M.C. and Wiggert, D.C., Mechanics of Fluids , 3rd ed.,
Brooks/Cole, 2002.
EBB 425/3 - Design and Development of Ceramic Products
Objective:
To give exposure and experience on all designs as well as the
involvement in ceramic R&D.
Synopsis:
This course covers topics on introduction to ceramic design i.e. design
consideration (cost, application requirements, etc.) and approaches
(empirical, deterministic, probabilistic). This course also covers on the
102
design and development of clay-based products related to the raw
materials, shapes, decoration, tools and techniques. Glaze design,
preparation and application of decal on clay-based ceramics. Mould for
slip casting (mould materials, design and quality control). Also the
design and developments in advanced ceramics according to their
application fields such as electronic, constructions, engineering and
medicals.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Able to propose the materials and tools in designing clay based
ceramic materials.
Able to select the decoration method for clay base ceramic
materials.
Able to classify the advanced ceramic materials for various
applications.
Able to justify the requirements in designing ceramic product.
Able to propose and design ceramic materials for specific
applications which include latest technology.
Davidge R. W., Mechanical Behaviour of Ceramics, Cambridge
University Press, 1980.
Saito S., Fine Ceramics, John Wiley & Son, 1987.
Mc Colm I. J. & Clark N. J., High Performance Ceramics,Blackie
& Sons (London), 1988.
Moulson A.J. and Herbert J.M., Electroceramics: Materials,
Properties and Applications, 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons,
2003.
S. Somiya, Advanced Technical Ceramics, Academic Press, 1989.
ASM Handbook, Ceramics and Glasses, volume 4, 1991.
ASM Handbook, Mechanical Testing and Evaluation, volume 8,
2000.
Y.M. Chiang, D. Birnie III, W.D. Kingery, Physical Ceramics:
Principles for Ceramic Science and Engineering, Wiley, 1997.
S. Mattison, Ceramics: Projects to practice and inspire, Sterling
Publishing Co., 1998.
103
4.11.0 PROGRAMME FOR BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING (HONOURS)
(MINERAL RESOURCES ENGINEERING)
PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES
1. Employable graduates having knowledge in Mineral Resources Engineering
complemented by appropriate skills and attributes.
2. Graduates having good leadership skills with the right attitudes and ethics.
3. Creative and innovative graduates with design and soft skills to carry out
various problem solving tasks.
4. Holistic graduates with sustainable development awareness.
5. Graduates who possess interest in research and lifelong learning, as well as
continuously striving for the forefront of technology.
PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
1. Graduates have the ability to acquire and apply the principles of engineering
knowledge, science and mathematics to the practice of mineral resources
engineering and related fields.
2. Graduates have acquired in-depth technical skills in mineral resources
engineering discipline
3. Graduates have the ability to identify, formulate and solve mineral resources
engineering related problems
4. Graduates have the ability to utilise systems approach to design and evaluate
operational performance
5. Graduates have the ability to comprehend the principle of design and
demonstrate the awareness of the sustainability issues in mineral resources
engineering
6. Graduates have the understanding of the professional and ethical
responsibilities of mineral resources engineers
7. Graduates have the ability to communicate effectively not only with
engineers but alsowith the community at large
8. Graduates have the ability to function effectively as an individual and in a
team with the capability to be a leader
9. Graduates have the awareness of social, global, cultural and environment
responsibilities of a mineral resources engineer
10. Graduates have the potential to enhance their professional development and
personal advancement through life-long learning
104
E
L
E
C
T
I
V
E
R
E
Q
U
N
I
V
C
O
R
E
C OUR S E
TYPE
4.11.1
14
2
EBS 110
Engineering Drawing
3
EBB 113
Engineering Materials
3
3
EMM 101
Engineering
Mechanics
EBS 101
Engineering Geology
3
Unit
B
R
E
A
K
S
E
M
E
S
T
E
R
S E ME S T E R 2
14
EML 101
Engineering Practice
EAS 152
Strength of
Materials
EBB 160
Physical Chemistry
of Engineering
Materials
EEU 104
Electrical
Technology
EUM 114
Advanced
Engineering Calculus
Code & Course
LE V E L 100
EUM 113
Engineering Calculus
Code & Course
S E ME S T E R 1
2
3
3
3
3
Unit
3
2
2
2
Tamadun Islam & Asia
Hubungan Etnik
Kursus Kemahiran/Opsyen
4
Ko-Kurikulum/Opsyen
2
2
3
3
3
Bahasa Inggeris/Opsyen
14
EBB 250
Computer Methods
for Engineer
EUP 222
Engineers in Society
EBS 209
Mineralogy
EBS 201
Mineral Deposits
3
Unit
B
R
E
A
K
S
E
M
E
S
T
E
R
S E ME S T E R 2
EAK 261
Geomatic
Engineering
15
EBS 242
Petrography & Ore
Microscopy
EBS 219
Introduction to
Mining Engineering
EBS 215
Comminution &
Sizing
EBS 210
Mining Engineering
Laboratory
Code & Course
LE V E L 200
Bahasa Malaysia /Opsyen
B
R
E
A
K
S
E
S
S
I
O
N
EBS 238
Fluid Mechanics
Code & Course
S E ME S T E R 1
B
R
E
A
K
S
E
S
S
I
O
N
105
4
3
3
3
2
Unit
3
EBB 338
Process Control
3
2
3
3
3
EBB 245
Engineering
Materials
Characterisation
14
EBS 341
Mineral Processing
Engineering
Laboratory
EBS 323
Pyrometallurgy
EBS 328
Geochemical
Exploration
EBS 339
Mineral Economics
3
Unit
3
EBS 329
Engineering Geophysics
B
R
E
A
K
S
E
M
E
S
T
E
R
EBS 308
Materials Transport
Engineering
Code & Course
S E ME S T E R 2
2
3
3
3
3
2
Unit
LE V E L 300
EBS 325
Mineral Chemistry
Laboratory
14
EBS 336
Analytical Chemistry
EBS 315
Hydrometallurgy
EBS 311
Mining Methods and
Law
EBS 322
Physical Mineral
Processing
EBB 300
Engineering Statistic
Code & Course
S E ME S T E R 1
CURRICULUM STRUCTURE FOR BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING (HONOURS) [MINERALS RESOURCES ENGINEERING]
5
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
I
N
D
U
S
T
R
I
A
L
10 Week
E B S 350
3
3
1
3
3
4
Unit
B
R
E
A
K
S
E
M
E
S
T
E
R
S E ME S T E R 2
EBS 432
Environmental
Chemistry for
Engineering Practice
EBS 418
Petroleum
Engineering
7
EBS 430
Final Year Project
EBS 419
Blasting Technology
Code & Course
LE V E L 400
T OT AL UNIT F OR G R ADUAT ION
EBB 498
Occupational Safety
and Health
EBS 425
Industrial Minerals
11
EBS 430
Final Year Project
EBS 429
Environmental
Engineering
EBS 417
Geomechanics
EBS 423
Mine and Plant
Design
Code & Course
S E ME S T E R 1
3
3
5
2
Unit
135
12
15
108
T otal
Unit
4.11.2 CURRICULUM
LEVEL 100
Semester 1
EUM 113/3
EMM 101/3
EBB 113/3
EBS 101/3
EBS 110/2
Engineering Calculus
Engineering Mechanics
Engineering Materials
Engineering Geology
Engineering Drawing
Total
3
3
3
3
2
14
Unit
Lecture
3
3
3
3
0
12
Lab
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
0
Total
3
3
3
3
Unit
Lecture
3
3
3
3
Lab
0
0
0
0
2
0
2
14
12
2
2
2
0
University Requirement
LMT 100/2
English Language
SEMESTER BREAK
Semester II
EUM 114/3
EEU 104/3
EAS 152/3
EBB 160/3
EML 101/2
Advanced Engineering Calculus
Electrical Technology
Strength of Materials
Physical Chemistry of Engineering
Materials
Engineering Practice
University Requirement
LKM 400/2
Malaysian Language
SESSION BREAK
106
LEVEL 200
Semester I
EBS 238/3
EBS 201/3
EBS 209/3
EUP 222/3
EBB 250/2
Fluid Mechanics
Mineral Deposits
Mineralogy
Engineers in Society
Computer Methods for Engineer
Total
3
3
3
3
2
14
Unit
Lecture
3
3
2
3
0
11
Lab
0
0
1
0
2
3
2
2
0
Total
2
3
3
3
4
Unit
Lecture
0
3
3
3
3
Lab
2
0
0
0
1
15
12
3
2
2
2
2
0
0
University Requirement
LMT 200/2
English Language
SEMESTER BREAK
Semester II
EBS 210/2
EBS 215/3
EBS 219/3
EBS 242/3
EAK 263/4
Mining Engineering Laboratory
Comminution & Sizing
Introduction to Mining Engineering
Petrology & Ore Microscopy
Geomatic Engineering
University Requirement
HTU 211/4
SHE 101/2
Islamic & Asia Civilization
Ethnic Relationship
SESSION BREAK
107
LEVEL 300
Total
Unit
Lecture
Lab
Eng. Statistic
Mining Methods and Law
Hydrometallurgy
Physical Mineral Processing
Analytical Chemistry
2
3
3
3
3
14
2
3
3
3
3
14
0
0
0
0
0
0
Mineral Chemistry Laboratory
Engineering Materials
Characterization
2
3
0
3
2
0
Total
3
3
3
3
2
Unit
Lecture
3
3
3
3
0
Lab
0
0
0
0
2
14
12
2
3
3
3
3
0
0
Semester I
EBB 300/2
EBS 311/3
EBS 315/3
EBS 322/3
EBS 336/3
Electives
EBS 325/2
EBB 245/3
SEMESTER BREAK
Semester II
EBS 308/3
EBS 328/3
EBS 323/3
EBS 339/3
EBS 341/2
Materials Transport Engineering
Geochemical Exploration
Pyrometallurgy
Mineral Economics
Mineral Processing Engineering
Laboratory
Electives
EBB 338/3
EBS 329/3
Process Control
Engineering Geophysics
SESSION BREAK – EBS 350/5 Industrial Training
108
LEVEL 400
Semester I
EBS 417/3
EBS 423/4
EBS 429/3
EBS 430/1
Geomechanics
Mine and Plant Design
Environmental Engineering
Final Year Research Project
Total
3
4
3
1
11
Unit
Lecture
3
4
3
0
10
Lab
0
0
0
1
1
3
3
3
3
0
0
Total
2
5
7
Unit
Lecture
2
0
2
Lab
0
5
5
3
3
3
3
0
0
Electives
EBS 425/3
EBB 399/3
Industrial Minerals
Occupational Safety and Health
SEMESTER BREAK
Semester II
EBS 419/2
EBS 430/5
Blasting Technology
Final Year Research Project
Electives
EBS 418/3
EBS 432/3
Petroleum Engineering
Environmental Chemistry for
Engineering Practice
SESSION BREAK
109
110
111
4.11.4
COURSE DESCRIPTION
EUM 113/3 – Engineering Calculus
Objective:
Synopsis:
This course reviews the concept of one and multivariable calculus and
covers the concept of ordinary differential equation. This course will
provide students with a variety of engineering examples and
applications based on the above topics..
Calculus of one variable:
Functions, techniques for solving differentiation and integration,
sequence and series, numerical solutions for solving differentiation and
integration.
Calculus of multivariable:
Scalar and vector fields, partial differentiation, chain rule, gradient,
directional derivative, Lagrange multiplier.
Multiple integral:
Double and triple integrals and their applications.
First order ordinary differential equation:
Solving differential equations: separable equations, homogenous and
non-homogenous equations, linear and non-linear equations, exact and
non-exact equations, Bernoulli equation and Ricatti equation.
Second and higher order ordinary differential equation:
Linear and homogeneous equations, non-homogeneous equations with
method of undetermined coefficients, variation of parameters, reduction
of order, D-operator, power series and Euler’s equation.
Laplace transform:
Definition and basic properties, step function, Direct Delta, Heaviside
function, Laplace transform method for solving ODE.
Numerical solutions:
Taylor, Euler and Runge Kutta methods for solving ODE.
Course
Outcomes:
References:
•
•
•
•
Able to define the concept of one and multivariable calculus
Able to recognize different methods for solving ODE.
Able to use the analytical and numerical methods for solving ODE.
Able to apply the above concepts for solving engineering
problems.
1.
Glyn James, “Modern Engineering Mathematics”, 2nd Edition,
Addison-Wesley, 1996.
112
Glyn James, “Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics”, 2nd
Edition, Addison-Wesley, 1999.
3. Silvanum P.Thompson, Martin Gardner (2008). Calculas Made
Easy, Enlarge
Edition. Johnston Press
8. J.N.Sharma. (2007). Numerical Method for Engineers, 2nd
Edition. Alpha Science
9. Smith R. T. and Minton, R., (2008), Calculus, 3rd edition, Mc
Graw Hill.
10. Ramana,B.V (2007)Higher Engineering Mathematics, 1st Edition.
Tata Mc Graw Hill
11. O’Neil , P.V.,
(2007). Advanced Modern Engineering
Mathematics, 1st Edition
8. Kreiyzig, E., (2010). Advanced Engineering Mathematics,10th
Edition.Wiley.Thomson
9. Stroud,K.A , Dexter.J.Booth(2007). Engineering Mathematics,6th
.Edition.Industrial Press
10. James Stewart (2011).Calculus,7th Edition, Brooks cole
11. James Stewart (2011).Multivariable Calculus,7th Edition, Brooks
Cole
12.Ron Larson,Bruce H. Edwards (2009). Calculus, 9th Edition. Brook
Cole
13. Steven Chapra, Raymond Canale (2009).Numerical Method for
Engineers,6th Edition. Mc Graw Hill
14. D.Vaughan Griffith,I.M Smith (2006). Numerical Method for
Engineers, 2nd Edition. Chapman and Hall
2.
EUM 114/3 – Advance Engineering Calculus
Objective:
Synopsis:
This course covers the concepts of linear algebra, Fourier series, partial
differential equation and vector calculus. This course will provide
students with a variety of engineering examples and applications based
on the above topics
Linear algebra:
Determinants, inverse matrix, Cramer’s rule, Gauss elimination, LU
(Doolittle and Crout), eigen value and vector eigen, system of linear
equation, numerical method for solving linear equation: Gause Seidel
and Jacobian.
Fourier series:
Dirichlet condition, Fourier series expansion, function defined over a
finite interval, half- range cosine and sine series.
Vector Calculus:
Introduction to vectors, vector differentiation, vector integration: line,
surface and volume, Green’s, Stoke’s and Gauss Div theorems.
113
Partial differential equation:
Method for solving the first and second order PDE, linear and non
linear PDE, wave, heat and Laplace equations.
Course outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Able to define the concept of linear algebra, Fourier series, partial
differential equation and vector calculus.
Able to understand and use the concept of linear algebra, Fourier series,
partial differential equation and vector calculus.
Able to use numerical methods for solving linear systems.
Able to apply the above concept for solving engineering problem.
References:
1.
Glyn J.,(2010).Modern Engineering Mathematics, 4th Edition .Pearson
2.
Glyn, J.(2010).Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics, 4th
Edition .Pearson
3.
Ramana,B.V (2007) Higher Engineering Mathematics, 1st Edition. Tata
Mc Graw Hill
4.
Peter V.O’Neil (2007). Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics,
1st Edition .Thomson
5.
Ron Larson,Bruce H. Edwards (2009). Calculus, 9th Edition. Brook
ColeSteven
6.
Chapra, Raymond Canale (2009).Numerical Method for Engineers,6th
Edition. Mc Graw Hill
7.
D.Vaughan Griffith,I.M Smith (2006). Numerical Method for
Engineers, 2nd Edition. Chapman and Hall
8.
Kreiyzig, E.,(2010).
Edition.Wiley
9.
J.N.Sharma.(2007). Numerical Method for Engineers, 2nd Edition.
Alpha
Advanced
Engineering
Mathematics,10th
10. Smith R. T. and Minton, R., (2008), Calculus, 3rd edition, Mc Graw
Hill.
EMM 101/3 – Engineering Mechanics
Objective:
To provide students with the fundamental concepts and principles of
rigid bodies in statics and dynamics equilibrium.
Synopsis:
This course is an introduction to the mechanics of rigid bodies. It is
divided into two areas: Statics and Dynamics. In Statics, the student
114
will learn the fundamental concepts and principles of rigid bodies in
static equilibrium. In Dynamics, the student will learn the fundamental
concepts and principles of the accelerated motion of a body (a particle).
Consideration is given on the fundamental of mechanics and structure
analysis, including concepts of free body diagram as well as force,
moment, couples, kinematic of motion, momentum, impulse,
conservation of energy and equilibrium analyses in two and three
dimensions.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to identify and resolve force magnitudes and vectors into
components
Able to describe and draw the free-body diagram and to solve the
problems using the equations of equilibrium.
Able to define the system of forces and moments and calculate the
resultants of force using the concept of equilibrium system.
Able to identify and calculate the centroid, centre of gravity and
area moment of inertia.
Able to describe the motion of a particle in terms of kinematics.
Able to apply equation of motion in solving dynamics problems.
Able to apply the principles of energy and momentum in solving
dynamics problems.
Hibbeler, R.C., Engineering Mechanics: Statics and Dynamics,
12th ed., SI Units, Prentice Hall, 2009.
Meriam, J.L. and Kraige, L.G., Engineering Mechanics: Statics
and Dynamics, 4th ed., Wiley, 1998.
Beer, F.P. and Johnston Jr.E.R., Vector Mechanics for Engineers:
Statics and Dynamics, 7th ed., SI Units, Mc Graw Hill, 2004.
EBS 101/3 - Engineering Geology
Objective:
To give an introduction to geological aspects and its application in
engineering.
Synopsis:
Introduction to geological principles with emphasis on the application
for the purpose of finding solutions to engineering problems.
Chemical and physical properties of the erth and the internal structure
of the earth.
Geological time scale and method to determine geological age.
Internal and external processes.
Magma activities, earthquake, volcanoes, metamorphism. Weathering,
erosion, gravity action.
Mineral and rock identification according to its types - igneous rock,
sedimentary rock and metamorphic rock.
Geologial structure, joint, fault, discontinuity, unconformity, fold,
strata.
115
Geological map. Use and interpretation. Apparatus used.
Plate tectonic theory. Continent drift, opening and closing of ocean,
convection current. Formation of mountains and other earth landforms.
Engineering properties on rocks, basics on the stability of slope and
tunnels.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Ability to understand the earth and its internal structure, the formation
of minerals and formation of three major rock types: igneous,
sedimentary and metamorphic rocks.
Ability to understand about the geologic time and deformation
processes that will change and influence the earth’s crust and the
features that develop as a result of the deformation processes: faults,
folds, syncline, anticline, joints
Able to understand about geological maps and its uses, and how the
geological maps are prepared
Able to relate engineering design parameters with the site investigation
as a first step in designing engineering earthwork projects. This is
shown in several case studies (such as environmental, beach erosion,
tsunamis, slope instability, road construction, natural disaster such as
floods and so on)
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Blyth, F.G.H. and De Freitas M.H. A Geology for
Engineers – 7th Edition, London:Edward Arnold, 1984.
Hobbs, B.E., Means, W.D. and Williams, P.F. Outline of
Structural Geology. New York: John Wiley, 1976.
Spencer, E.W. Physical Geology. London: AddisonWesley Publishing Company,1983.
Tarbuck, EJ. and Lutgens, F.K. The Earth: An
Introduction to Physical Geology, 4thEdition. New
York: Macmillan Publishing Company, 1993.
EBS 110/2 - Engineering Drawing
Objective:
To give basic knowledge in drawing concept applicable to engineering.
Synopsis:
This course emphasizes on basic engineering design and drawings
through manual method and by using CAD software. It covers basic
methodology for traditional and concurrent design as well as basic
engineering graphic principles such as drawing size, line styles, texts,
conventional symbols, orthographic and isometric projection, multiview drawings, dimensioning, section, part list and assembly and
production drawings as well as standards in engineering drawing.
116
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to apply the knowledge of basic engineering design and
graphic principle in engineering field
Able to transform ideas to drawings according to acceptable
standards.
Able to produce engineering drawings using CAD
Frederick E.Giesecke et.al. Technology Drawing Twelfth Edition,
Prentice Hall 2003.
Mohd Razman Mainal et al Lukisan Kejuruteraan Asas. 2nd Edition
UTM Publication
A.W. BOUNDT. Engineering Drawing. Sixth Edition Mcgraw
Hill 2006.
EEU104/3 – Electrical Technology
Objective:
This course introduces students to the fundamental concepts and
electrical elements. This course covers direct current (DC) circuit
analysis, alternate current (AC) one-phase circuit analysis, three-phase
AC circuit analysis, and electromagnetic circuits.
Synopsis:
Units, Definitions, Experimental Laws and Simple Circuits
System of units, charge, current, voltage, and power types of circuits
and elements. Ohm’s law, Kirchhoff’s laws, analysis of a single-loop
current, single node-pair circuit, resistance and source combination,
voltage and current division.
Circuit Analysis Techniques
Nodal and mesh analyses, linearity and superposition, source
transformations, Thevenin’s and Norton’s theorems.
Inductance and Capacitance
The V-I relations for inductor and capacitor, inductor and capacitor
combinations, duality, linearity and its consequences.
Source-free Transient Response of R-L and R-C Circuits
Simple R-L and R-C circuits, exponential response of source free R-L,
R-C circuits.
Response to Unit Step Forcing Function
Response of R-L and R_C circuits to unit step forcing functions.
Response to Sinusoidal Forcing Function
Characteristic of sinusoidal forcing functions, response of R-L and R-C
circuits to sinusoidal forcing functions.
117
Phasor Concept
The complex forcing function, the phasor, phasor relationships for R, L
and C, impedance and admittance
Average Power and RMS Values
Instantaneous power, average power, effective values of current and
voltage, apparent power and power factor, complex power.
Power System Circuits
An overview of single and three phase systems, wye and delta
configurations of three circuits, wye and delta transformations, and
power calculations in three phase systems.
Magnetic Circuits and Devices
Concept and laws of magnetism and analysis of transformers.
Introduction to electromechanical energy conversion, operation of
machines as generators and motors, power loss, efficiency and
operations at maximum efficiency.
Course
Outcomes:
References:
•
•
•
•
•
•
To understand basic quantity and unit definitions.
To understand the basic of electrical.
To understand the principle of DC circuit analysis.
To understand the principle of transient circuit analysis.
To understand the principle of AC circuit analysis.
To understand the principle of magnetic device, magnetic circuit
and transformer.
1.
Huges, “Electrical and Electronic Technology”, 10th ed, Pearson
Prentice Hill, 2008.
Alexander and Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”, 3rd ed,
Mc Graw Hill, 2007.
Nilsson and Riedel, “Electric Circuits”, 8th ed, Pearson Education,
2008.
2.
3.
EAS 152/3 - Strength of Materials
Objective:
To equip students with basic knowledge about fundamental principles
that governs the strength and stiffness of deformable bodies.
Synopsis:
Tension, compression and shear, Axially loaded bars, Torsionally
loaded circular bars, Laterally loaded beams, Deflection, Stress and
strain analysis, Columns.
118
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Able to identify effect of axial, torsional and flexural loads on
stresses and deflection in deformable bodies
Able to analyze stresses and deflection in deformable bodies under
the action of axial, torsional and flexural loads
Able to evaluate the effect of axial, torsional and flexural loadings
by means of suitable diagrams and graphical means
James M. Gere, Mechanics of Materials - 5th Edition,
Brooks/Cole, 2001.
Ferdinand P.Beer, E.Russell Johnston, Jr. and John
T.DeWolf,Mechanics of Materials, International Edition - 3rd
Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002.
William Nash, Strength of Materials - 4th Edition, Schaum’s
Outlines,McGraw-Hill, 1999
Russel C.Hibbeler, Mechanics of Materials – 4th edition, Prentice
Hall,1999.
Meor Othman Hamzah, Pengantar Analisis Struktur, Penerbit
Universiti Sains Malaysia, 1988.
EML 101/2 – Engineering Practice
Objective:
To provide the exposure and basic knowledge of hands-on engineering
practices that includes the academic aspects as well as practical
trainings in learning and teaching of common engineering workshop
works and also to optimize the use of available resources in the
laboratory.
Synopsis:
Trainings are based on theoretical and practical concepts which consists
of manufacturing process; computer numerical control (CNC), lathe,
mill and thread machining, joint process, arc welding, gas welding and
MIG welding, metrology measurement, electric and electronic circuits,
and safety practice in laboratory and workshop.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
Able to comply with the workshop procedures and safety
regulation.
Able to identify and to use common engineering tools in proper
and safe manners.
Able to produce engineering work-piece using the correct tools and
equipments within the time allocated.
Able to carry out accurate engineering measurement and label the
dimensions and tolerance.
Child, J.J., An Introduction to CNC Machining, Cassell
Computing, 1984.
119
2.
3.
4.
Kalpakjan, S., Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, 3rd ed,
Addison Wesley, 1995.
Ibrahim Che Muda dan Ramudaram, N., Teknologi Bengkel
Mesin, 1995.
Ahmad Baharuddin Abdullah, Modul Kerja Amalan Kejuruteraan
(PPKM), 2005.
EBS 238/3 - Fluid Mechanics
Objective:
To introduce the concept, analysis and the fluid in static and dynamic
condition.
Synopsis:
Basic information on characteristics of floating bodies, forces when
constant linear acceleration and constant rotational acceleration is
applied. Fluid kinematics, momentum and Bernoulli equation and flow
measurements. Boundary layers, control and separation, lift and drop
forces.
Flow in pipes, pipe network analysis. Flow in open channel, critical
flow and normal flow, hydraulic pump, fully developed flow that varies
gradually. Hydraulic machines and pressure changes in pipes.
Dimensional analysis, similarity models and hydraulic models.
Hydraulic machine, impulse turbines, reaction turbines and centrifugal
pump. Pressure change in pipes, simple methods, surge tank.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to understand of the basic principals of fluid mechanics.
Able to to apply the above principals in order to perform
calculations and solve problems relating to theory.
Able to understand of the principals of fluid flow, in particular
laminar and turbulent flow regimes.
Able to understand dimensional analysis and be able to use
dimensionless ratios to form relationships between fluid properties
after experimentation.
Able to understand the principals of fluid machinery, in particular
pumps and hydraulic circuits and be able to design simple
machinery systems.
Bruce, R.M. Fundamentals of Fluid Mechanics. New York: John
Wiley & Sons. 1998.
John, A.R. Engineering Fluid Mechanics. New York: John Wiley
& Sons. 1997.
Irving, H.S. Mechanics of Fluids. New York: McGraw-Hill. 1992
120
EBS 201/3 - Mineral Deposits
Objective:
To give an introduction to the occurrence mineral deposits.
Synopsis:
Morphological properties of ore bodies. Textural and structural
properties of ore and gangue minerals. Fluid inclusions.
Geothermometry and geobarometry. Paragenesis sequence. Zoning.
Regional and metallorgraphy epoch. Theories on ore genesis. Sulphide
stratiform deposits: Pb-Zn stratabound deposits. Alluvial deposits (Au,
Sn) including paleoplacer. Banded iron formations. Manganese,
phosphate and evaporate deposits. Coal. Residual deposits. Secondary
enrichment. Raw materials: ceramic and construction. Sulfide deposits.
Stratabound volcanogenic massive. Porphyry Copper. Quartz veins
hydrothermal deposits (gold, tin, uranium, copper). Contact
metamorphism and metamorphic deposits.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to define and describe ore deposits with its main
characteristics (physical, chemical, alteration, etc.)
Able to describe the various classifications of ore deposits based
on its genesis (genetic classification)
Able to distinguish metallic (iron, copper, lead, zinc, aluminum,
cobalt, nickel, gold, platinum, tin, rare earth elements, etc) ,and
non-metallic ore deposits (gemstones, industrial minerals such as
clays, sands, limestone, granites, dimension stones, building
materials)
Able to understand the uneven distribution of ore deposit
formations in space and time
Able to describe various factors that influence the formation of
ores and its marketability to mineral industry
Edwards, R. and Atkinson, K. 1986. Ore Deposit Geology.
London: Chapman and Hall.
Evans, A.M. 1993. Ore Geology and Industrial Minerals 3rd
Edition. London: Blackwell Scientific Publications, 1993.
Bateman, A.M. 1951. The formation of Mineral Deposits. London:
John Wiley & Sons.
EBS 209/3 - Mineralogy
Objective:
To indentify and to understand the development of mineral crystals, the
physical properties of minerals, the basic method in mineral
classification system and mineral types
Synopsis:
To prepare student with a broad and fundamental knowledge of
minerals, which is a major constituent of earth material (rock and ore),
and formed in various geological environments. Emphasis is given in
understanding of mineral definition and characteristics in terms of
121
formation phenomenon, crystallography, mineral chemistry, physical
properties, classification system and groups, including mineral
identification and analysis techniques.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Able to be acquainted with mineral definition and nomenclature.
Able to identify and classify minerals into different
crystallographic system and classes.
Able to relate minerals to its various specified physical properties,
chemical composition, formula calculation, phase diagrams and
mineral stability.
Able to know the basic theories, techniques and instruments
practically used in mineral identification and analysis.
References:
1.
Berry, L.G.; Mason, B.; and Dietrich, R.V. 1983. Mineralogy-Concepts, Descriptions, Determinations. 2nd edition. San
Francisco: Freeman.
2.
Blackburn, W.H. and Dennen, W.H. 1994. Principles of
Mineralogy. 2nd edition. Dubuque: Wm. C. Brown Publishers.
3.
Deer, W. A.; Howie, R.A.; and Zussman, J. 1992. An Introduction
to the Rock- Forming Minerals. 2nd edition. New York: Wiley.
[Standard in the field, used by mineralogists and petrologists who
investigate rocks in thin section.]
4.
Ford, W.E., 1949. A Textbook of Mineralogy with an Extended
Treatise on Crystallography and Mineralogy by Edward Salisbury
Dana: John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 851 p.
EAK 263/4 - Geomatic Engineering
Objective:
To gain knowledge on the concepts and applications of geomatic in
Civil Engineering and to develop an understanding of the geomatic
instrumentation, analysis and methodology.
Synopsis:
Introduction to geomatics engineering, vertical control, horizontal
control, detailing, earth works.
Field work divided into two components:
• Component 1: Practical work encompassing levelling survey,
traversing survey and tacheommetric surveying;.
• Component 2: Annual Intensive Geomatic Practical for one
week intensive encompassing all practical work at a site.
122
Course
Outcomes:
References:
To be able:
• To distinguish the framework of geomatic engineering for the
various types of surveying and appreciate the use and care of
instruments.
• To describe the concepts of vertical controls, horizontal controls,
methods of detailing, and applies the knowledge in the geomatic
engineering practices.
• To conduct field surveys as individuals and in groups, reduce
observed data and presentation of results with emphasis on
professional responsibility and work ethics.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Schofield, W., (2001) 'Engineering Surveying', 6th. Edition,
Butterworths, London.
Kavanagh, B.F., (2009) 'Surveying: Principles and Application',
8th. Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall.
Uren, J. and Price, W.F., (1985) 'Surveying for Engineers',
MacMillan, 2nd Edition.
Wilson, R.J.P., (1985) 'Land Surveying', 3rd Edition, MacDonald
and Evans.
Bannister, A. and Raymond, S., (1992) 'Surveying', 6th. Edition,
Longman Scientific & Technical.
Bannister, A. and Baker, R., (1989) 'Solving Problem in
Surveying', Longman Scientific & Technical.
Clancy, J., (1991) 'Site Surveying & Leveling', ELBS: London.
Kenie,T.J.M. and Petrie,G., (1990) 'Engineering Surveying
Technology', Blackie.
Irvine, W., (1995) 'Surveying for Construction', 4th Edition,
McGraw-Hill: London.
McCormac, J.C., (1999) 'Surveying', 4th Edition, Prentice Hall.
Shepherd, F. A. (1981), ‘ Advanced engineering surveying :
problems and solutions’, Arnold.
Schofield, W. (1993), ‘Engineering surveying: theory and
examination problems for students’, Wright.
Irvine, William, (2006), ‘Surveying for construction’, New York:
McGraw-Hill Book Co.
Paul Watson et al., (2008), ‘Surveying and engineering: principles
and practice’, Boston: Blackwell Pub.
Johnson, Aylmer, (2004) ‘Plane and geodetic surveying: the
management of control networks’, New York: Spon Press.
Nathanson, Jerry A.et. al., (2006), ‘Surveying fundamentals and
practices’, N.J.: Pearson Prentice Hall.
Ghilani, Charles D., (2008), ‘Elementary surveying: an
introduction to geomatics’, N.J.: Pearson Prentice Hall.
123
EBS 210/2 - Mining Engineering Laboratory
Objective:
To give some exposure on the basic expreminents that covers the
engineering and mining aspects.
Synopsis:
Course specially designed for hands-on knowledge and experience on
the ability to conduct experiments, data interpretation and data analysis
based on basic engineering principles for various aspects of mining
engineering. Experiments incorporated in this course include that for
effective Geological Identification of rocks and minerals, Grain Size
Analysis for soil mechanics, Determination of Soil Plasticity and
Liquid Limits, Tensile Strength Analysis, Hardness Testing, Uniaxial
Compressive Strength of rock materials, Determination of Point Load
Strength Index of rocks and the understanding, calculation and
evaluation of Direct Shear Test results.
Course
Outcomes:
References:
•
Able to identify, explain and describe the various basic analytical
test procedures in mining engineering based on sound engineering
principles.
•
Able to identify, calculate and interpret of various outcomes/results
of experiments carried out based on mining engineering knowledge
towards effective minerals resource development.
1.
Berry P.L., An Introduction to Soil Mechanics, New York:
McGraw-Hill, 1987.
Brady, B. and Brown, E., Rock mechanics for underground
mining, London: George, Allen and Unwin. 1985
Brown, E. Rock characterisation, testing and monitoring, Oxford:
Pergamon, 1981.
ummins A,B and Given I,A., Editors, SME Mining Engineering
Handbook, New York, Society of Mining Engineers, 1973.
Hartman, H.L., Introductory Mining Engineering, New York: John
Wiley & Sons, 1987
Head, K.H., Soil laboratory testing, U.K.: Pentech Press, 1980.
Hoek, E. and Brown, E., Underground excavations in rock,
London: IMM, 1980.
Shakelforld, J.F., Introduction to Materials Science for Engineers,
Maxwell-MacMillan, 1992.
Smith, W.F., Principles of Materials Science and Engineering,
Singapore: McGraw-Hill, 1990.
Thomas, L.J., An Introduction to Mining, Sydney: Methuen, 1978
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
124
EBS 215/3 - Comminution and Sizing
Objective:
To give an introduction to the crushing and grinding of rock with size
classification and sampling for the purpose of mineral recovery or for
the purpose of rock size reduction as required in mining and quarrying.
Synopsis:
The course covers the basic comminution and sizing processes and
technologies for rocks, minerals and mineral related products. Students
are introduced to the basic theories and principles of comminution and
sizing processes, type of equipments, their operations and performance.
Students are also introduced to various concepts which include basic
calculations and using simulation softwares in comminution/sizing
flowsheet design. Real plant examples with the awareness of its impact
on environment and sustainability of natural resources are also covered.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to explain the basic concept/principle in comminution and
sizing processes and describe and the technology, types and
characteristics of comminution and sizing machines in the market
Able to evaluate and calculate the prediction of equipment
performance.
Able to classify and apply knowledge of basic comminution and
sizing principles to real situations with an awareness of its impact
on environment and sustainability of natural resources.
Able to design a proper comminution /sizing process flow sheet to
meet a specific application.
Lynch, AJ. 1977. Development in Mineral Processing, Mineral
Crushing, Grinding Circuits. Elsivier.
Kelly, E.G. and Spottiswood, DJ. 1982. Introduction to Mineral
Processing. New York: John Wiley.
Wills, B.A. 1997. Mineral Processing Technology: An introduction
to the Practical Aspects of Ore Treatment and Mineral Recovery,
6th Edition. Oxford: Pergamon.
EBS 219/3 - Introduction to Mining Engineering
Objective:
To give an introduction to ore reserve and exploration, mining and
quarrying, drilling method, blasting and their application, ground water
and their related problems
Synopsis:
Introduction to holistic and global mining and quarrying engineering
concepts towards efficient mineral development, significance of
minerals in national and industrial development, complemented by
professional and ethical responsibilities in the mineral industry. Major
course components towards introductory mining engineering include
125
types of mineral occurrences, prospecting techniques; ore reserve
evaluation, drilling and rock fragmentation, mining methods and
technology, mineral processing and technology, environmental
management, occupational safety and health practices and groundwater
management.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
Able to identify, explain and determine the various factors
affecting the selection of appropriate mining engineering methods
and technology.
Able to formulate, evaluate and design an effective mining
technique towards efficient mineral resource development in mines
and quarries; taking into consideration environmental and
occupational safety and health aspects.
Able to function as a multi-discipline team, complemented with
effective communication skills, to Identify, Apply and Describe the
application of mining engineering knowledge towards effective
minerals resource development worldwide.
Hartman, H.L. 1987. Introductory Mining Engineering. New
York: John Wiley and Sons.
Atlas Powder Company. 1987. Explosives and Rock Blasting.
Dallas: Atlas powder Company.
EBS 242/3 - Petrography & Ore Microscopy
Objective:
To give some exposure to the students on the concept, theoretical and
practical aspects on optical mineralogy.
Synopsis:
To equip students with a broad techniques and methodologies in
mineral and rock identification and classification by petgrophics study
for most of the silicate minerals and ore microscopic study for metallic
mineral using polarized microscope (petrographic microscope).
Familiarized with petrographic identification, and classification
techniques (textural and composition) of various igneous (including
pyroclastic rock), sedimentary rock and metamorphic rocks. Provide
broad knowledge of microscopic study of metallic ore that have
economic important and process mineralogy (mineral processing) and
other geological paragenesis study of the ore occurrence
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
Able to identify various silicates, non-silicate and other metallic
mineral in rock and ore based on optical properties.
Able to prepare thin-section and polished sections for petrographic
and ore microscopic study.
126
•
•
References:
Capable to identify various metallic ore minerals and non-metallic
minerals based on optical properties , texture and physical
properties and its important to process mineralogy
Able to identify and classify various igneous rocks based on
several classification schemes, mineral composition and texture as
well their formation in the field.
Optical mineralogy and Petrography
1.
2.
3.
4.
Berry, L.G.; Mason, B.; and Dietrich, R.V. 1983. Mineralogy
Concepts, Descriptions, Determinations. 2nd edition. San
Francisco: Freeman.
William D Ness. 1986. Introduction to Mineralogy ,Oxford
University Press.
Cornelis Klein and Cornelius S. Hurlbut, Jr 1977 .Manual of
Mineralogy, John Wiley & Sons, New York, revised 21st edition).
Cornelis Klein Loren A Raymond Lab Manual, Minerals and
Rocks, by (John Wiley & Sons, New York).
Ore microscopy
1. Craig,Jr And Vaughan,Dj (1981) Ore Microscopy and Ore
Petrography. Wiley-Interscience, 406pp.
2. Ineson P. R 1989 Introduction to Practical Ore Microscopy
3. Picot,P And Johan,Z (1977) Atlas des Mineraux Metalliques.
BRGM Mem. 90-1977, 407pp. (in Fr.).
4. Ramdohr,P (1980) The Ore Minerals and Their Intergrowths.
Pergamon Press, 2nd edition in 2 vols., 1205pp.
EUP 222/3 - Engineers in Society
Objective:
To provide knowledge on ethics, management, law and financial
accounting related to engineering industry and the related framework
necessary for the effective conduct to the society and industry.
Synopsis:
This course provides exposure to students the fundamentals principles
of engineering ethics such as code of engineering ethics and the
responsibility of a professional engineer, basic law covering
introduction to Malaysian Laws, engineering accounts and basic
introduction to management theory.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
Introduce the fundamental theoretical principles related to
engineering ethics, basic law for engineers, engineering accounting
and basic management.
Practice the real understanding on the fundamental theoretical
principles related to engineering ethics, basic law for engineers,
engineering accounting and basic management.
127
•
References:
Appreciate the importance of the fundamental theoretical
principles in actual construction industry.
1. Abdul Aziz Hussin & Abdul Rashid Abdul Aziz, (2000), Aspek
Undang-undang Tort Dalam Projek Pembinaan, Pulau Pinang
Penerbit Universiti Sains Malaysia.
2. Akta Pendaftaran Jurutera dan Peraturan, 1967 (Pindaan
Sehingga 1998).
3. Boatright, J. R., (2000), ‘Ethics and The Conduct of Business’,
New Jersey, Prentice-Hall.
4. Dyson, J. R., (1999), ’Accounting for Non-Accounting Students,
London, Pitman Publishing.
5. Hairul Azhar Abdul Rashid, et. al., (2004), ‘Engineers in Society’,
Kuala Lumpur, McGraw Hill.
6. Harrison, W.T, & Horngren, C. T., (2001), ‘Financial Accounting’,
New Jersey, Prentice-Hall.
7. Jaafar Muhamad, (1999), ’Asas Pengurusan, Petaling Jaya, Fajar
Bakti.
8. Radford, J.D., (1998), ’The Engineer in Society’, London,
Macmillan.
9. Robbins, S.P., & Coulter, M, (2004), ‘Management’, New Jersey,
Prentice-Hall.
10. Shaik Mohd Noor Alam, (1998), ’Undang-undang Komersil
Malaysia’, Kuala Lumpur, Dewan Bahasa Pustaka.
11. Velasquez, M.G., (1998), ‘Business Ethics’, New Jersey, PrenticeHall.
12. Wu Min Aun, (2000), ‘Sistem Perundangan Malaysia’, Petaling
Jaya, Longman.
EBB300/3 : Engineering Statistics
Objective:
Strengthening knowledge and skills in mathematical modeling to
provide students in understanding engineering mathematics concepts
then able to formulate and solve engineering problems.
Synopsis:
This course covers the topics: The role of experimental design in
engineering fundamentals and applications of experimental design such
as sampling
distributions, data analysis, factorial design,
regression and correlation. Provide an understanding of the concept of
complex numbers. Provides
approaches to problem solving and
mathematical modeling rules.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
Identified the factors of experimental design and links this
knowledge in the field of engineering applications
Recognizing patterns and procedures in experimental design
including defining problems, identifying the parameters of the
dependent and independent and analyze data
128
•
•
•
References:
Applying the principles of regression and correlation of
engineering problems
Analyzing the problems of modeling, engineering and construction
of the factors in a mathematical modeling in engineering
Formulate engineering problems and the solution in the form of
mathematical modeling
1. Douglas C. Montgomery, (2009), Design and Analysis of
Experiments, Wiley, 7th Edition.
2. Diran Basmadjian, Ramin Farnood , (2006), The Art of Modeling
in Science and Engineering with Mathematica, Second Edition,
Chapman & Hall/CRC
3. Douglas C. Montgomery, Scott M. Kowalski, (2010), Design and
Analysis of Experiments: MINITAB Companion, Wiley, 7th edition.
4. Edward B. Magrab, Shapour Azarm, Balakumar Balachandran,
James Duncan, Keith
Herold,
Gregory
Walsh,(2011),
An
Engineers Guide to Matlab, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall.
5. Kreiyzig, E., (2010). Advanced Engineering Mathematics,10th
Edition, Wiley
6. Ramana,B.V., (2007) Higher Engineering Mathematics, 1st Edition,
Tata Mc Graw Hill.
EBS 311/3 - Mining Methods and Law
Objective:
To give a comprehensive knowledge on mining methods for the mining
and quarrying operation and the laws related to the industry.
Synopsis:
This course covers topics on mining methods for mineral and rock
extraction on surface and underground extraction and the related law
related to mining and quarrying operation.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to know the basic mining methods for extracting ore for
surface and underground mining and the activities involved.
Able to understand the factors that influence the decision on
embarking on any specific mining methods.
Able to know the related laws and the relevance of the law with
effect to the mining and quarrying operation
Hartman, H.L. Introductory Mining Engineering. New York:
John Wiley and Sons. 1987
Cummins, A. B. and Gien, I. A. (1973). SME Mining Engineering
Handbook. New York: Society of Mining Engineers of the
American Institute of Mining , Metallurgical and Petroleum
Engineers, Inc.
Thomas, L.J. (1978). An Introduction to Mining. Sydney:
Methuen of Australia.
129
4.
Lewis, R.S. (1964). Elements of Mining. New York: John Wiley
and Son
EBS 315/3 - Hydrometallurgy
Objective:
Introduction of hydrometallurgical and electrometallurgical principles
in the extracting of metals from minerals.
Synopsis:
The course is designed to provide an introduction to the central
principles and practices of hydrometallurgical and electrometallurgical
unit processes, basic metal and mineral dissolution and separation
processes to recover metals and metal compounds from ores,
concentrates and secondary resources and how they are used to design
and control plant process to successfully produce the desired metals.
Major unit processes involved leaching, solution purification, metal
recovery, materials production and water pollution control discussed
includes lectures, and coursework assignments. The course is also
design for
student to apply the fundamental aspects of
hydrometallurgy, thermodynamics and kinetics of hydrometallurgical
processes for the aqueous extraction of metals. Finally, the factors that
determine the success of a difficult electrolytic process will also be
considered. Modern applications and emerging metal extractive
processes used in hydrometallurgy and electrometallurgy will be
addressed.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
References:
Able to identify and analyze various unit processes used in
hydrometallurgical process routes and to apply physico-chemical
principals and concepts in the development of an extractive hydroelectrometallurgical processes with respect to pre-treatment,
mineral dissolution and separation aspects of leaching processes.
Able to Identify the scientific and technological achievements and
research challenges in the hydro-electrometallurgical process
routes toward metal recovery
Apply fundamental aspects of hydrometallurgy,
thermodynamics and kinetics of hydrometallurgical processes for
the aqueous extraction of metals
Able to establish the environmental considerations involved in
mineral and metal extraction processes.
1.
Jackson, E. (1986). Hydrometallurgical Extraction and
Reclamation, Ellis Horwood Limited.
2. Gupta, C.K. (1990). Hydrometallurgy in Extraction Processes.
Volume 1. CRC Press. Boston. USA
3. Gupta, C.K. (1990). Hydrometallurgy in Extraction Processes.
Volume II. CRC Press. Boston. USA. (TN 688, G 975)
4. Habashi, F. (1970). Principles of Extractive Metallurgy, Volume.2:
Hydrometallurgy. Gordon and Breach.
130
EBS 322/3 - Physical Mineral Processing
Objective:
Gravity concentration. Jigging, flowing film devices, concentration
tables. Application of gravity methods to concentration. Flowsheet
design.
Synopsis:
The course covers the standard physical mineral processing methods
and equipments that are widely used in the mineral industries. Students
are introduced to theories, principles, mechanism and the performance
of the processes. The methods covered are gravity concentration using
gravity concentrator such as panning, palong, jig, spiral, shaking table,
Mozley table, heavy medium separation, wet and dry magnetic
separation, high-tension separation and froth flotation. Students are also
introduced to material balancing such as process performance and
efficiency concepts which include basic calculations of grade, recovery,
enrichment ratio and concentration ratio. Designing of flow sheet using
real plant examples with the awareness of its impact on environment
and sustainability of natural resources are also covered.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to distinguish and describe the basic concept/principle,
mineral characterization and equipment in physical mineral
processing.
Able to design a proper flow sheet to obtain the concentrate from
the ore.
Able to evaluate and calculate the prediction of equipment
performance.
Able to classify and apply knowledge of physical mineral
processing to real situations with an awareness of its impact on
environment and sustainability of natural resources.
Wills, B.A. Mineral Processing Technology: An Introduction to
the Practical Aspects of Ore Treatment and Minerals Recovery, 6th
Edition . Oxford: Pergamon 1997.
Taggard, A.F. Handbook of Mineral Dressing. New York: John
Wiley. 1954.
Kelly, E.G. and Spottiswood, D.J. Introduction to Mineral
Processing. New York: John Wiley. 1982.
EBS 336/3 - Analytical Chemistry
Objective:
Provide knowledge to the students the basic principles to analytical
chemistry and wet application analytical techniques and tools in
131
identifying and determining the content of a substance in qualitative
and quantitative
Synopsis:
This course deals with the principles and techniques of quantitative
analysis and instrumental analysis. The students will learn the basic
tools and operations of analytical chemistry, data handling and
statistical analysis. The topic also covers guidelines of good laboratory
practice (GLP) to assure validation of analyses (QA). General concepts
of chemical equilibrium, acid base titrations and equilibria,
complexometric titrations, gravimetric analysis and precipitation
titrations and redox titrations will be covered in this course. This course
is divided into 4 sections.
Section A: Concepts in analytical chemistry - will review fundamental
concepts such as moles and concentrations of solutions, various types of
analysis, importance of statistics in analytical chemistry and sampling.
Section B will touch on the classical methods such as titrations,
gravimetry and separations (e.g. solvent extraction). Instrumental
techniques in Section C will cover spectrochemical analysis which
include uv-viz spectrometry and section D will discuss on Atomic
spectrometric methods and introduction and application of x-ray
Fluorescence spectrometry. Examples and emphasis will be given to
geological, ore and mineral samples.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
References:
Able to design an analytical method based on what information is
needed and how to obtain a laboratory sample that is representative
of the whole, to prepare it for analysis using the available
measurement tools and finding the statistical significance of the
analysis.
Able to identify the substance which may be present in the
unknown materials and to determine the exact amount of the
identified substance.
Able to learn the analytical process ie. defining the problem,
selecting a method, obtaining a representative sample, preparing
the sample for analysis, performing the necessary chemical
separations and measurements and finally calculating the results
and reporting the data.
Able to acquire the knowledge of stoichiometry and to use the
principles of volumetric analysis and how stoichiometric
relationships are used in titrations to calculate the mass of analyte.
Christian, G.D. Analytical Chemistry, 6th Edition. John Wiley &
sons. 2000.
2. Jeffery, G. H., Bassett, J., Mendham, J. and Denney, R.C. (1989).
Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis. 5th
Edition.UK: Longman.
1.
132
3.
4.
Levie, Robert de. (1997). Principles of Quantitative Chemical
Analysis. International Edition. Singapore: McGraw-Hill. [QD
271.7 D348].
Potts, P.J. (1987). A Handbook of Silicate Rock Analysis. New
York: Blackie and Son Ltd. [ fQ E438 P871].
EBS 325/2 - Mineral Chemistry Laboratory
Objective:
To give emphasis on the practical aspect related to atomic adsorption
spectrometry XRF and UV the analysis in determining the composition
minerals in rocks or samples.
Synopsis:
This laboratory course focuses on the application of “wet“ classical
methods of mineral analysis from the acid base titration to the use of
modern instrumental techniques in mineral analysis. To perform or
carry out chemical analyses using the basic tools and operations of
analytical chemistry in the determination, separation and extraction of a
mineral or an ore sample, quantitatively through wet chemical analyses
and instrumental analyses
The students will be given hands on experience on using analytical
tools and volumetric glasswares apparatus in learning the analytical
process to acquire analytical data of high accuracy and precision in the
mineral chemistry lab like learning to use the analytical balance,
accurate sample weighing, learning to carry out chemical
measurements, learning the basic principles of titration and determining
and preparing standard solutions for a standard calibration plot in
instrumental analysis.
The students will gain practical experience in using the ultravioletvisible spectrophotometry, atomic absorption spectroscopy, x-ray
fluorescence and x-ray diffraction techniques in the identification and
detection of elements and mineral phases and practically conduct the
elemental and mineral analysis to quantitatively determine the ions and
mineral presence in the ores and unknown samples.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Able to perform the analysis and quantitatively determine the
elements present in an ore sample or an unknown sample.
Able to conduct and carry out instrumental analysis .
Able to use the acquired experimental and instrumental knowledge
to design new and improved methods in determining unknown
elements and compounds in a concentrate or mineral samples.
Able to identify the substance which may be present in the
unknown materials and to determine the exact amount of the
identified substance.
133
References:
1. Christian, G.D. (2004). Analytical Chemistry . 7th Edition. USA:
John Wiley and Sons
2. Jeffery, G. H. , Bassett, J., Mendham, J. and Denney, R.C. (1989).
Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitaive Chemical Analysis. 5th Edition. UK:
Longman.
3. Levie, Robert de. (1997). Principles of Quantitative Chemical
Analysis. International Edition. Singapore: McGraw – Hill.
[ QD
271.7 D348]
4. Potts, P.J. (1987). A Handbook of Silicate Rock Analysis. New
York: Blackie and Son Ltd. [ fQ E438 P871]
EBS 308/3 - Materials Transport Engineering
Objective:
To give knowledge on transport in the activities related to mining and
quarrying.
Synopsis:
The course covers the material handling methods and equipments that
are widely used in mining and mineral industries. Student are
introduced to theories, principles, mechanism and the performance of
the equipments. The topics covered are conveyor belt conveyors, chain
conveyors and bucket elevators, screw conveyors and elevators,
shaking and vibratory conveyors, fluid transport, rope haul systems,
monorails and aerial ropeways, locomotive haulage and hoist and mine
winders. Students are also introduced to the basic of calculation of
tonnage, speed, motor power, and the efficiency of the equipments.
Designing of flow sheet using real plant examples with the awareness
of its impact on environment at cost effective are also covered.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Able to distinguish and describe the materials handling methods
the basic concept, principle and apply the technology, types and
characteristics of materials handling equipments that are widely
used in mining and mineral industries.
Able to design a proper flow sheet to transport material and ores
from one place to another place or from one unit to another unit
and evaluate/calculate the equipment performance.
Able to classify and apply knowledge of material handling to real
situations with an awareness of its impact on environment at cost
effective
Brook, N. 1971. Mechanics of Bulk Materials Handling. London
Butterworths
Handbook Society of Mining Engineers. 1979. New York.
Hartman H.L., 1987. Introductory Mining Engineering. New York.
John Wiley & Son.
Ramlu
M.
A.
1996.
Mine
Hoisting.
A.A
Balkema/Rotterdam/Brookfield
134
EBS 328/3 – Prospecting Geochemistry
Objective:
To introduce the exploration methods using geochemistry and its
approaches to mineral resource assessment.
Synopsis:
Types
of
geochemical
survey:
soil,
stream
sediment,
hydrogeochemistry, heavy minerals, lithogeochemistry, and
biogeochemical. Environment. Primary versus secondary.
Dispersion patterns (primary and secondary), pathfinder elements, path
indicator elements. The role of chemical and physical weathering. The
role of pH, Eh, adsorption, mobility on dispersion patterns.
Basic principles: contamination, orientation surveys, anomalies, false
anomalies, reconnaissance survey, regional and detailed surveys.
Sampling, sampling media, magnitude of sampling.
Statistical treatment of geochemical data - simple statistics, lognormal
statistics, geostatistics. The application of statistical interpretation to
geochemical survey.
Students are required to do field work employing the techniques that
they've learned from the course work. They will do sampling, analyze
the samples and interpret the geochemical data.
Case studies will be used as guides to the usefulness of geochemistry in
mineral exploration.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Able to know the basic principles that guide geochemical
exploration as an indirect method to detect the presence of ore
deposits.
Able to know and describe the primary and secondary
environments where the ores are found and dispersion patterns that
occurs as a result of different interaction in the environments.
Able to describe the sampling media (soil, rocks, water, stream
sediments, vegetation, lakes, volatiles) and methods that are
commonly employed in the exploration program (pitting,
trenching, chips sampling, core drilling).
Able to describe the three main methods of survey used in the
geochemical exploration program (orientation, reconnaissance and
detailed surveys).
Able to describe the laboratory techniques that is involved in the
analyses of samples (wet chemistry, the use of AAS, ICP, etc.).
Able to analyze, display and interpret exploration data using
statistical techniques (parametric and nonparametric statistics) and
contouring techniques, and to make inferences from the statistical
135
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
calculations to arrive at conclusions of the exploration program.
Able to describe the objectives and philosophy for future mineral
exploration program and its future challenges.
Levinson, A.A.
Introduction to Exploration Geochemistry.
Illinois USA: Applied Publishing Ltd. 1974.
Hawkes, H.E. and Webb, J.S.
Geochemistry in Mineral
Exploration. New York: Harper and Row Publishers. 1962.
Reedman, J.H. Techniques in Mineral Exploration. London:
Applied Science Publishers Ltd. 1979.
EBS 323/3 Pyrometallurgy
Objective :
To know the general principles and different techniques of metals
extraction and refining from ores at high temperatures for both ferrous
and non-ferrous metals.
Synopsis :
This course is a general introduction to pyrometallurgy. It covers the
basic principles and actual industrial practice of extraction and refining
of iron, steel, and other important non-ferrous metals. The topics
covered are: thermodynamic principles, Ellingham diagram, blast
furnace iron making including the physicochemical reactions, direct
reduction processes, principles of steel making, major reactions and
refining of steel, principles and practice of clean steel making, major
process steps in non-ferrous metal extraction, roasting, matte smelting,
vapour metallurgy, refining of non-ferrous metals, industrial practice
for common non-ferrous metals.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
Able to analyse the available processes critically, including the
environmental effects.
Able to differentiate options to extract metals from their minerals.
Able to compare processes to achieve the maximum benefit.
Able to examine the environmental, economical and energy related
issues of the available processes.
Able to discriminate the potentials of new acquired processes in
metals extraction
EBS 339/3 - Mineral Economics
Objective:
To introduce the economic concept in the mineral resources
exploitation.
Synopsis:
Introduction to sampling techniques, methods of investment analysis
for new mining projects. Cashflow analysis. Comparison between
alternative investment types. Evaluate the costing for investment
appraisals. Economic evaluation of mineral resource industry projects.
136
Economic ore evaluation and optimum selection of ore reserve
evaluation techniques. Factors effecting planning costs, phases of work
for preparation of feasibility studies and preliminary system reports.
Ore reserve evaluation techniques using geostatistical method, which
includes semi-variography (structural analysis), kriging, global
estimation, optimisation of sampling grids, topographical profiling;
complemented by triangular, polygonal and weighted/inverse distance
evaluation methods.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to list or recognize most of the facts, concepts and techniques
of mineral economics evaluations.
Able to analyze data within contexts covered in the syllabus with
some guidance, using the majority of techniques covered in the
syllabus plan.
Able to solve and critically review the reliability, validity and
significance of the data and use this to synthesize a reliable market
appraisal with investment recommendations.
Able to classify and determine the various factors affecting the
economics of mineral development.
Able to determine, Formulate and Design an efficient ore reserve
evaluation technique towards economic mineral resource
development.
Barnes, M.P.
Computer-Assisted Mineral Appraisal and
Feasibility. New York: AIME. 1980.
Cummins, A.B. and Given, I.A. (Editors).
SME Mining
Engineering Handbook.
Newy York: Society of Mining
Engineers. 1973.
Crawford, J.T. and Hustrulid, W.A. (Editors). Open Pit Pit Mine
Planning and Design. New York: Society of Mining Engineers.
1979.
EBS 341/2 - Mineral Processing Engineering Laboratory
Objective:
To give practical exposures to processes in mineral recovery.
Synopsis:
Students will conduct practical relating to the operations and in
determining the performance and efficiency of equipments in the
mineral-processing laboratory.
Physical processing
Comminution: Crushing and screening, fine grinding and classification
methods.
Mineral concentration methods: Gravity, flotation, magnetic and hightension separation.
137
Chemical Processing
Leaching: Introduction to several techniques of leaching e.g.
Solvent extraction: for refining pregnant solution from the solvent
extraction step.
Electrowining and Electrorefining processes to recover valuable metal
from solution.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to carry out experiments using the basic concept of physical
mineral processing in the determination, separation and extraction
of a mineral or an ore sample
Able to demonstrate proper use and care of all equipment and
materials
Able to evaluate and calculate the prediction of equipment
performance.
Able to design and prepare a technical report based on laboratory
experiment.
Able to identify, calculate and the interpretation of various
outcomes/results of experiments carried out based on mineral
processing engineering knowledge towards effective minerals
resource development.
Wills, B.A. Mineral Processing Technology: An Introduction to
the Practical Aspects of Ore Treatment and Minerals Recovery, 6th
Edition . Oxfaord: Pergamon 1997.
Taggard, A.F. Handbook of Mineral Dressing. New York: John
Wiley. 1954.
Kelly, E.G. and Spottiswood, D.J. Introduction to Mineral
Processing. New York: John Wiley. 1982.
EBS 329/3 - Engineering Geophysics
Objective:
To introduce the geophysical aspects in mineral exploration.
Synopsis:
Application of various common geophysical techniques in subsurface
condition investigation which have practical and economic objective.
To provide students with sufficient knowledge in the basic principles of
geophysics and geophysical methods, instrumentation, field procedures,
to make simple interpretation and application. The use of the
geophysical methods in mineral, mining and oil exploration,
archeology and phenomenon/features which are likely to have
engineering implication in geological engineering and environmental
management.
138
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to be acquainted with the definition and basic concept of
geophysics, geophysical techniques and practices in engineering,
exploration and environmental geophysics fields including,
advantages, suitability and planning requirements
Ability to comprehend with various /common geophysical
techniques, related basics principles and theories, instrumentation
and field methods/procedures.
Ability to choose and planning geophysical survey, data
acquisition, data processing and presentation.
Ability to interpret geophysical survey data to solve related
geophysical problems via various conventional and latest
interpretation techniques using specific geophysical modeling and
inversion techniques/software and presentation.
Abdul Rahim Shamsudin (1990). GEOFIZIK Konsep dan
Penggunaan, Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka, Kuala Lumpur.
Berry, L.G.; Mason, B.; and Dietrich, R.V. 1983. Mineralogy-Concepts, Descriptions, Determinations. 2nd edition. San
Francisco: Freeman.
Grant F.S. and. West G.F, 1965. Interpretation Theory in Applied
Geophysics, International Series in the Earth Sciences, McGrawHill.
EBS 350/5 - Industrial Training
Objective:
Course
Outcomes:
A ten weeks industrial training during long vacation i.e. after the
second semester final examination (third year level). Students will get
their placement at various industrial sectors related to mineral resources
engineering. They should experience the real exposure as an engineer
in this field. Students will be given training on various aspects such as
analysis, design, management, quality control and economy, which
related to their career as a materials engineer. This is a compulsory
training.
•
Students are place at various industries related to mineral resources
engineering to gain exposure.
EBS 417/3 - Geomechanics
Objective:
To acquire the knowledge related to soil and rock and the stresses
involve in rock excavation.
Synopsis:
The course covers the soil mechanics and rock mechanics appropriate
for mining and geotechnical practice.
139
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Able to use relevant information and understand its influence on
engineering behavior of rock and soil.
Able to understand the engineering behavior of a rock or soil in
mining or excavation.
Able to visualize discontinuity data using stereograms.
Able to appreciate and aware of rock engineering in the context of
the geotechnical and related industries.
Budhu, M. Soil Mechanics and Foundation. New York: John
Wiley & Sons. (2000).
Hoek,
E.
Rock
Engineering.
Web
page
–
www.rockeng.utotonto.ca/roc/Hoek/Hoek.htm (2000).
Hoek E. and Brown E.T. Underground Excavations in Rock.
London: The Instituion of Mining and Metallurgy. (1980).
Hoek, E. and Bray, J.W. Rock Slope Engineering. London: The
Instituion of Mining and Metallurgy. (1980)Brady, B.H.G. and
Brown, E.T. Rock Mechanics for Underground Mining. London:
Georgr Allen & Unwin. (1985)
EBS 423 - Mine and Plant Design
Objective:
To give the exposure to the students in conducting design of a mine or
quarrying operation that begins from the raw data and investigates the
feasibility of the project.
Synopsis:
The course begins with the boreholes data and geological data of an
area with mineral or rock potential for a mine or for a quarry
respectively. Then the students have to apply their own knowledge and
other references in producing a report on a design of a mine and plant.
The report is akin to a feasibility report that contains the treatment of
the data, the planning of a mine, designing of a mine and mineral
processing circuit, economic study and recommendations
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
Referances:
1.
2.
Able to analyze the geological data and boreholes or exploration
data.
Able to know the procedures in conducting a feasibility study.
Able to work in a team in problem solving and work closely in
finding means and ways to information retrieval and innovative.
Able to use appropriate software for the undertakings.
Able to report and appraise suitable mining and processing method
and product based on raw data given.
Hartman, H.L. and Mutmansky, J.M. (2002). Introductory Mining
Engineering. New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons Inc.
, R.B. (2000). Blasters’ Handbook. Cleveland: International
140
3.
4.
Society of Explosives Engineers.
Cummins, A.B. ang Given, I.A. (1973). SME Mining Engineering
Handbook. Volume 1 and 2. New York: Society of Mining
Engineers of the American Institute of Mining Metallurgical and
Petroleum Engineers, Inc.
Weiss. N.L. (1985). SME Mineral Processing Handbook. Volume
1 and 2. New York: Society of Mining Engineers of the American
Institute of Mining Metallurgical and Petroleum Engineers, Inc.
EBS 429/3 - Environmental Engineering
Objective:
To give a basic knowledge on the environmental applicable to
engineering practice and to mineral resources recovery activities.
Synopsis:
Understanding and critique on the various environmental legislations
and guidelines. Analysis and Evaluation of environmental pollution;
complemented by monitoring and assessment of the critical levels and
movement of pollutants supplemented by in-depth studies on the health
effects of the various types of pollution. Explanation and appraisal on
the various causes, monitoring, assessment and control practices in the
industry for effective pollution management and control aimed towards
sustainable development. Understanding and description of the
mechanisms for creating an Environmental Impact assessment and
Environmental Audit. Justification on the importance of energy
conservation and environmental-friendly (green) technology
References:
1. Davis, M.L. and Cornwell D.A. Introduction to Environmental Engineering.
Boston: PWS Publishers. 1985
2. Nazaroff, W.W. and Alvarez-Cohen, L. Environmental Engineering Science.
New York: John Wiley and Sons.2001
3. Pandey, G.N. and G. C. Carney, G.C. Environmental Engineering. USA: Tata
McGraw-Hill. 1989
4. Ray, B.T. Environmental Engineering. New York: PWS. 1995
EBS 425/3 - Industrial Minerals
Objective:
To enforce the students’ knowledge in the occurrence of industrial
minerals and their application due to the requirement of the industries.
Emphasis is given to the local mineral resources.
Synopsis:
To develop knowledge and awareness about the important and
development of various industrial mineral and other related mineralbased industries including energy mineral in practical and integrated
ways. Be able to discuss about the broad aspects of industrial mineral
in term of geological occurrence, distribution, marketing, economic and
141
application technology. Broad knowledge about process technology
and methods apply in mineral development, exploitation and evaluation
techniques
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to identify and analyze various industrial minerals categories
of application and functions in many downstream manufacturing
process and industrial applications.
Able to identify and classify individual industrial mineral in terms
geological occurrences, physical, chemical and other characteristic
based
on
industrial
classification,
technology
properties/requirements and specification.
Able to discuss and analyzing the broad aspects of industrial
mineral in terms of world distribution, application technology,
market trend and demand (economic analysis) demographically
and in time space.
Able to evaluate the suitability of industrial mineral resources in
accordance with industrial requirement, practice and international
standards.
Birley, A.W. and Scoot, M.J. Industrial Minerals: Properties and
Applications. Glasgow: Leonard Hill. 1982.
Boynton, R.S. Chemistry and Technology of Lime and Limestone,
2nd Edition.New Yorks: John Wiley and Sons. 1980.
Gobbett, D.J. and Hatchinson, C.S. Geology of the Malay
Peninsula. London: John Wiley and Sons Inc. 1973.
EBS 419/2 - Blasting Technology
Objective:
To give a comprehensive in the usage of explosive in rock blasting and
its control in the operation and in the environmental aspect.
Synopsis:
The course covers the basic types of commercial explosives and usage
of explosives materials in rock blasting for mining, quarrying and also
in construction.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Able to know the common explosives types used for blasting in
mining, quarrying and construction.
Able to understand the basics usage of explosive materials and
accessories and the basic concept delay blasting and its effect to a
good blast design.
Able to design and examine blasting pattern apply in bench
blasting, tunneling and construction using explosives.
Able to investigate and monitor the hazards involve in the usage of
explosives, its safety measures and their impact towards
environment.
142
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hopler, R.B. Blasting handbook. Ohio: International Society of
Explosives Engineers. (2000).
Sen, G.C. Blasting Technology. Sydney: University of New South
Wales Press Ltd. (1995).
Hustrulid, W. Blasting Principles for Open Pit Mining. Volume 1
- General Design and Concept. Rotterdam: Balkema. (1999).
Konya, D. J. Blast Design. Ohio: Intercontinental Development
Corporation. (1995).
EBS 430 - Final Year Research Project
Objective:
To give an exposure in running a research project.
Synopsis:
This course offers further understanding on selected topic in Mineral
Resources Engineering. Each student is given a title for an individual
research project. Research include literature review, analysis of
previous work, research experimental design and experimental set up.
Executing experimental work, collecting data, discussion, dissertation
writing and oral presentation. In the oral presentation, the student is
expected to produce a written report and to be defended in front of a
panel of examiners.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
Able to understand the background of the topics of research given
or proposed.
Able to know the references, tools or instrument required to
undertake the research.
Able to create innovativeness of the students in undertaking
problems faced in research.
Able to understand the appropriate format in writing a research
report.
Able to analyse the findings and its usefulness related to mineral
resources engineering or general engineering.
EBS 418/3 - Petroleum Engineering
Objective:
To give an introduction toward the upstream operation in recovery of
petroleum.
Synopsis:
The course covers the occurrence of petroleum, geology, exploration,
basic reservoir engineering, drilling method, drilling fluid, formation
evaluation, production technology, natural gas, transport of crude oil,
production sharing contract and the operation areas of Petronas and its
contractors.
Course
Outcomes:
•
Able to understand the units and terminology used in the basic
143
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
petroleum engineering.
Able to understand the basic principles of the occurrence of crude
oil and natural gas in the formation and methods of exploration and
the processes or operation involve in recovering oil and natural gas
from the ground.
Able to know the uses or the importance of drilling fluid and basic
materials used in the drilling fluid.
Able to compliment other courses in mineral resources engineering
for the purpose of adapting in the petroleum industry.
N.J. (1985). Drilling Engineering: A Complete Well Planning
Approach. PennWell Publishing Company, Oklahoma.
Gartlin, C. (1960) Petroleum Engineering: Drilling and Well
Completions. Prentice-Hall Inc. Englewood Cliffs, NJ (USA).
Conaway, C.F. (1999). The Petroleum Industry: A Nontechnical
Guide. PenWell Publishing Company, Oklahoma.
EBS 432/3 - Environmental Chemistry for Engineering Practice
Objective:
To give a knowledge in the application of chemistry in the assessing
the environmental quality for engineering application.
Synopsis:
This course introduces a new branch of the discipline of chemistry
which is the most interdisciplinary that provide us with the specific
knowledge on the theoretical basis for understanding the distribution,
transformation, toxicity and other environmental properties of
chemicals. It also introduces the concept of physical chemistry,
analytical knowledge and the fundamental chemical principles of
different processes adopted by environmental engineering. It is
designed to assist the engineering students and environmental
practitionist in understanding how the chemical applications fit their
daily needs in environmental chemistry. The fundamental aspects are
also utilized in considering the great global environmental chemistry
processes including respiration, photosynthesis and chemical evolution.
The management of hazardous chemicals and risk assessment are
treated as an aspect of environmental chemistry. The first section of the
syllabus text will cover a review of basic chemistry topics relevant to
environmental engineering which includes physical chemistry, organic
chemistry and analytical chemistry. The next section deals with
discussion on the major spheres (atmospheres, hydrospheres and
pedospheres) and their inter-relationships. The last section deals with
processes involving chemical equilibria, followed by chemical
processes and the physiochemical processes used in the treatment of
industrial wastes water. The basic principles governing some of the
most important processes will be covered.
Course
Outcomes:
•
Able to apply the knowledge of chemistry in these different
144
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
processes in redesigning or modifying existing processes.
Able to define and characterize the different types of wastes in
order to study the sources, reactions, transport and fate of the
chemical entities in the air, water and soil environments as well as
their effects on human health and the natural environment.
Able to describe the behavior of natural chemical entities in natural
systems and to apply the practical knowledge focus on the
environmental management of chemicals and hazardous wastes
which is the major area of concern.
Able to solve environmental problems using the knowledge of
chemical principles related to environmental problems.
Manahan, Stanley E. ,(2001). “Fundamentals of Environmental
Chemistry”. Second edition. Lewis Publisher, Washington D.C.
Connell, Des W., Hawker, D.W., Warne, Michael St. J. and
Volwes, Peter P, (1997). “Basic Concepts of Environmental
Chemistry”. CRC Press.Lewis Publisher. USA.
Matlack, Albert S. (2001). “Introduction to Green Chemistry”.
Marcel Dekker Inc. USA.
Wang, Lawrence K. and Wang , Mu Hao Sung. (1992).
“Handbook of Industrial Waste Treatment”. Volume 1. Marcel
Dekker Inc. USA.
145
4.12.0
PROGRAMME FOR BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING (HONOURS)
(POLYMER ENGINEERING)
PROGRAMME OBJECTIVES
1.
Employable graduates having knowledge in Polymer Engineering
complemented by appropriate skills and attributes.
2.
Graduates having good leadership skills with the right attitudes and ethics.
3.
Creative and innovative graduates with design and soft skills to carry out
various problem solving tasks.
4. Holistic graduates with sustainable development awareness.
5.
Graduates who possess interest in research and lifelong learning, as well as
continuously striving for the forefront of technology.
PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
1.
Graduates have the ability to acquire and apply knowledge of science and
engineering fundamentals in polymer engineering and related fields.
2.
Graduates have acquired in‐depth technical competence in polymer
engineering discipline.
3.
Graduates have the ability to undertake problem identification, formulation
and solution in polymer engineering.
4.
Graduates have the ability to utilise systems approach to design and
evaluate operational performance related to polymer engineering.
5.
Graduates have the ability to comprehend the principles of design for
sustainable development in polymer engineering.
6.
Graduates have the understanding of professional
responsibilities required in polymer engineering field.
7.
Graduates have the ability to communicate effectively, not only with
engineers but also with the community at large.
8.
Graduates have the ability to function effectively at individual and
organizational level with the capacity to be a leader.
9.
Graduates have the awareness of the social, cultural, global and
environmental responsibilities of a professional engineer.
10.
Graduates have the ability to acquire current knowledge and contemporary
issues through life-long learning.
146
and
ethical
4.12.1
E
L
E
C
T
I
V
E
S
C
O
R
E
COURSE
TYPE
3
EBP 103
Polymer
Organic
Chemistry
14
2
3
EBB 113
Engineering
Materials
EBS 110
Engineering
Drawing
3
EMM 101
Engineering
Mechanics
SEMESTER 1
Code & Course
Unit
EUM 113
3
Engineering
Calculus
B
R
E
A
K
S
E
M
E
S
T
E
R
14
EEU 104
Electrical
Technology
EML 101
Engineering
Practice
EUM 114
Advance
Engineering
Calculus
3
2
3
B
R
E
A
K
S
E
S
S
I
O
N
EBB 250
Computer
Methods for
Engineer
EBP 202
Polymer
Structure
EBP 201
Polymer
Synthesis
EBP 200
Polymeric
Materials
2
4
3
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
SEMESTER 1
Code & Course Unit
EUP 222
3
Engineering
in Society
14
Bahasa Malaysia/Opsyen
English/Option
Co-curriculum/Option
Islamic & Asia Civil
Ethnic Relations
Entrepreneurship
SEMESTER 2
Code & Course Unit
EBB 160
3
Physical
Chemistry of
Engineering
Materials
EAS 152
3
Strength of
Materials
LEVEL 100
B
R
E
A
K
S
E
M
E
S
T
E
R
13
EBB 215
Semiconductor
Materials
EBP 207
Transport
Phenomena
in Polymers
EBP 216
Polymer
Engineering
Laboratory
EBP 212
Latex
Processing
3
2
2
3
SEMESTER 2
Code & Course Unit
EBP 204
3
Elastomeric
Materials
LEVEL 200
CURRICULUM STRUCTURE - BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING (HONOURS) [POLYMER ENGINEERING]
3
EBB 498
Occupational
Safety and
Health
3
2
2
3
3
3
3
EUP 301
Engineering
Management
(compulsory)
EBB 300
Engineering
Statistic &
Mathematical
Modelling
16
Rubber
Laboratory
EBP 306
Properties of
Polymer
Materials
E
EBPi 320i
EBP 303
Plastic
Materials
EBP 310
Plastic
Processing
EBB 345
Engineering
Materials
Characterization
147
B
R
E
A
K
S
E
S
S
I
O
N
SEMESTER 1
Code & Course
Unit
EBP 308
3
Rubber:
Processing &
Products
B
R
E
A
K
S
E
M
E
S
T
E
R
13
EBP 314
Resin
Manufacturing
Latex
Laboratory
EBP 324
Polymer
Degradation
& The
E
EBPi 316 t
EBB 341
Quality
Control &
Management
EBP 307
Polymer
Rheology
3
2
3
3
2
SEMESTER 2
Code & Course Unit
EBP 317
3
Advanced
Polymer
Composites
LEVEL 300
5
T
R
A
I
N
I
N
G
I
N
D
U
S
T
R
I
A
L
1
2
3
2
3
B
R
E
A
K
S
E
M
E
S
T
E
R
8
EBP 412
Specialty
Engineering
Polymers
EBP 402
Mould &
Die
Design
3
3
SEMESTER 2
Code & Course Unit
EBP 401
5
Final Year
Project
LEVEL 400
TOTAL UNIT FOR GRADUATION
EBB 323
3
Fabrication
Technology
of
Semiconducter
11
EBP 401
Final Year
Project
EBP 418
Plastic
Laboratory
EBP 415
Fiber
Processing
EBP 420
Rubber
Engineering
EBP 400
Product
Design &
Failure
Analysis
SEMESTER 1
EBP 350
10 Week Code & Course Unit
135
12
15
108
Total
Unit
4.12.2
CURRICULUM
LEVEL 100
Semester I
EUM
EMM
EBB
EBS
EBP
113/3
101/3
113/3
110/2
103/3
Engineering Calculus
Engineering Mechanics
Engineering Materials
Engineering Drawing
Polymer Organic Chemistry
Total
3
3
3
2
3
-------14
--------
Unit
Lecture
3
3
3
0
3
-------12
--------
Lab
0
0
0
2
0
-------2
--------
2
2
0
Total
3
Unit
Lecture
3
Lab
0
3
3
2
3
-------14
--------
3
3
2
3
-------14
--------
0
0
0
0
-------0
--------
2
2
0
University Requirement
LMT
100/2
English Language
SEMESTER BREAK
Semester II
EBB
160/3
EAS
EUM
EML
EEU
152/3
114/3
101/2
104/3
Physical Chemistry of Engineering
Materials
Strength of Materials
Advanced Engineering Calculus
Engineering Practice
Electrical Technology
University Requirement
LKM
400/2
Malaysian Language
SESSION BREAK
148
LEVEL 200
Semester I
EBP
EBP
EBP
EUP
EBB
200/3
201/3
202/3
222/3
250/2
Polymeric Materials
Polymer Synthesis
Polymer Structure
Engineers in Society
Computer Methods for Engineers
Total
3
3
3
3
2
-------14
--------
Unit
Lecture
3
3
3
3
2
-------14
--------
Lab
0
0
0
0
0
-------0
--------
2
2
0
Total
3
2
3
3
2
-------13
--------
Unit
Lecture
3
2
3
3
0
-------11
--------
Lab
0
0
0
0
2
-------2
--------
2
2
2
2
0
0
University Requirement
LMT
200/2
English Language
SEMESTER BREAK
Semester II
EBP
EBP
EBP
EBB
EBP
204/3
207/2
212/3
215/3
216/2
Elastomeric Materials
Transport Phenomena in Polymers
Latex Processing
Semiconductor Materials
Polymer Engineering Laboratory
University Requirement
HTU
SHE
211/4
101/2
Islamic & Asia Civilization
Ethnic Relationship
SESSION BREAK
149
LEVEL 300
Semester I
EBP
EBP
303/3
306/3
EBP
EBP
EBP
EBB
308/3
310/3
320/2
300/2
Plastic Materials
Properties of Polymer Materials
Engineering
Rubber : Processing & Products
Plastic Processing
Rubber Laboratory
Engineering Statistics & Mathematical
Modeling
Total
3
3
Unit
Lecture
3
3
Lab
0
0
3
3
2
2
3
3
0
2
0
0
2
0
-------16
--------
-------14
--------
-------2
--------
3
3
0
3
3
0
Total
2
2
3
3
Unit
Lecture
2
0
3
3
Lab
0
2
0
0
3
-------13
--------
3
-------11
--------
0
-------2
--------
3
3
0
Electives
EUP
301/3
EBB
245/3
Engineering Management
(compulsory)
Engineering Materials
Characterization
SEMESTER BREAK
Semester II
EBP
EBP
EBP
EBP
307/2
316/2
317/3
324/3
EBB
342/3
Polymer Rheology
Latex Laboratory
Advanced Polymer Composites
Polymer Degradation & The
Environment
Quality Control & Management
Electives
EBP
314/3
Resin Manufacturing
EBP 350/5 - Industrial Training
150
LEVEL 400
Semester I
EBP
EBP
EBP
EBP
EBP
400/3
415/3
418/2
420/2
401/1
Product Design & Failure Analysis
Fiber Processing
Plastic Laboratory
Rubber Engineering
Final Year Project
Total
3
3
2
2
1
-------11
--------
Unit
Lecture
3
3
0
2
0
-------8
--------
Lab
0
0
2
0
1
-------3
--------
3
3
0
3
3
0
Total
5
3
-------8
--------
Unit
Lecture
0
3
-------3
--------
Lab
5
0
-------5
--------
3
3
0
Electives
EBB
323/3
EBB
398/3
Fabrication Technology of
Semiconductor
Occupational Safety and Health
SEMESTER BREAK
Semester II
EBP
EBP
401/5
402/3
Final Year Project
Mould & Die Design
Electives
EBP
412/3
Specialty Engineering Polymers
SESSION BREAK
151
152
153
4.12.4
COURSE DESCRIPTION
EUM 113 Engineering Calculus
Objective:
This course reviews the concept of one and multivariable calculus and
covers the concept of ordinary differential equation. This course will
provide students with a variety of engineering examples and
applications based on the above topics.
Synopsis:
Calculus of one variable:
Functions, techniques for solving differentiation and integration,
sequence and series, numerical solutions for solving differentiation
and integration.
Calculus of multivariable:
Scalar and vector fields, partial differentiation, chain rule, gradient,
directional derivative, Lagrange multiplier.
Multiple integral:
Double and triple integrals and their applications.
First order ordinary differential equation:
Solving differential equations: separable equations, homogenous and
non-homogenous equations, linear and non-linear equations, exact
and non-exact equations, Bernoulli equation and Ricatti equation.
Second and higher order ordinary differential equation:
Linear and homogeneous equations, non-homogeneous equations with
method of undetermined coefficients, variation of parameters,
reduction of order, D-operator, power series and Euler’s equation.
Laplace transform:
Definition and basic properties, step function, Direct Delta, Heaviside
function, Laplace transform method for solving ODE.
Numerical solutions:
Taylor, Euler and Runge Kutta methods for solving ODE.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
Able to define the concept of one and multivariable calculus.
Able to recognize different methods for solving ODE.
Able to use the analytical and numerical methods for solving
ODE.
154
•
Able to apply the above concepts for solving engineering
problems.
References:
12. Glyn J., (2010). Modern Engineering Mathematics, 4th Edition,
Pearson
13. Glyn, J., (2010). Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics,
4th Edition, Pearson
14. Silvanum P.Thompson, Martin Gardner (2008). Calculus Made
Easy, Enlarge Edition. Johnston Press
15. J.N. Sharma. (2007). Numerical Method for Engineers, 2nd
Edition. Alpha Science
16. Smith R. T. and Minton, R., (2008), Calculus, 3rd edition, Mc
Graw Hill.
17. Ramana,B.V (2007). Higher Engineering Mathematics, 1st
Edition. Tata Mc Graw Hill
18. O’Neil , P.V.,
(2007). Advanced Modern Engineering
Mathematics, 1st Edition
19. Kreiyzig, E., (2010). Advanced Engineering Mathematics,10th
Edition, Wiley-Thomson
9. Stroud, K.A, Dexter J. Booth (2007). Engineering Mathematics,
6th .Edition.Industrial Press
10. James Stewart (2011).Calculus ,7th Edition, Brooks cole
11. James Stewart (2011). Multivariable Calculus,7 th Edition,
Brooks Cole
12. Ron Larson, Bruce H. Edwards (2009). Calculus, 9th Edition.
Brook Cole
13. Steven Chapra, Raymond Canale (2009). Numerical Method for
Engineers, 6th Edition. Mc Graw Hill
14. D.Vaughan Griffith,I.M Smith (2006). Numerical Method for
Engineers, 2nd Edition, Chapman and Hall
EMM 101/3 – Engineering Mechanics
Objective:
To provide students with the fundamental concepts and principles of
rigid bodies in statics and dynamics equilibrium.
Synopsis:
This course is an introduction to the mechanics of rigid bodies. It is
divided into two areas: Statics and Dynamics. In Statics, the student
will learn the fundamental concepts and principles of rigid bodies in
static equilibrium. In Dynamics, the student will learn the fundamental
concepts and principles of the accelerated motion of a body (a particle).
Consideration is given on the fundamental of mechanics and structure
analysis, including concepts of free body diagram as well as force,
moment, couples, kinematic of motion, momentum, impulse,
155
conservation of energy and equilibrium analyses in two and three
dimensions.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to identify and resolve force magnitudes and vectors into
components
Able to describe and draw the free-body diagram and to solve the
problems using the equations of equilibrium.
Able to define the system of forces and moments and calculate the
resultants of force using the concept of equilibrium system.
Able to identify and calculate the centroid, centre of gravity and
area moment of inertia.
Able to describe the motion of a particle in terms of kinematics.
Able to apply equation of motion in solving dynamics problems.
Able to apply the principles of energy and momentum in solving
dynamics problems.
Hibbeler, R.C., Engineering Mechanics: Statics and Dynamics,
12th ed., SI Units, Prentice Hall, 2009.
Meriam, J.L. and Kraige, L.G., Engineering Mechanics: Statics
and Dynamics, 4th ed., Wiley, 1998.
Beer, F.P. and Johnston Jr. E.R., Vector Mechanics for Engineers:
Statics and Dynamics, 7th ed., SI Units, Mc Graw Hill, 2004.
EBB 113/3 - Engineering Materials
Objective:
Students are expected to acquire the fundamental knowledge on
engineering materials especially on the classification of materials,
properties and applications.
Synopsis:
The course is an introductory course on engineering materials which is
divided into two main parts. The first part includes the classifications of
materials that determine their applicability in various engineering fields.
The fundamentals on the concept of bonding, crystallinity and
imperfection of solid are introduced. The first part also includes the
behavior of material in thermal equilibrium (free energy concept, phase
transformation and examples of phase diagrams), diffusion mechanisms
and usual causes of failure in a given material. Topic on corrosion and
degradation has also been introduced. The second part dwells on the
properties, applications, processing and manufacturing of specific class
of material: metals, ceramics, polymer and composite.
Examples on the use of these materials in various engineering fields are
introduced and discussed. Introduction of electrical properties of
materials is also presented focusing on semiconductor material. In
general, this introductory materials science and engineering course deals
with the main classes of materials: metals, ceramics, polymers and
composites, as well as the various kinds of properties exhibited by these
156
materials which intended to equip the students with necessary knowledge
on material science and engineering.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
References:
Able to describe general properties, structure, processing and
performance of materials.
Able to identify the types of corrosion, explain the mechanism and
causes thus express the appropriate corrosion prevention.
Able to describe the mechanism of various failure modes and
predict the appropriate design principles to prevent in-service
failures.
Able to describe the properties of semiconductor materials from
the perspective of band structure, addition of impurities,
temperature dependence.
Able to define different classification of engineering materials.
Able to explain the electronic structure of individual atom as well
as inter-atomic bonding and crystal structure of solids.
Able to differentiate the types of imperfections that exist and the
role they play in affecting the behavior of materials.
Able to distinguish between steady state and non- steady state
diffusion.
Able to state how various mechanical properties are measured and
what these properties represent.
Able to interpret the phase diagram in design and phase
transformation with regards to various heat treatments.
1.
Textbook
W.D. Callister, Jr., Materials Science and Engineering: An
Introduction, , 8th edition, Wiley, 2010.
2.
Reference books
(i) Donald R. Askeland, Pradeep P. Phulé, The Science and
Engineering of Materials, , Chapman & Hall, 5th edition,
Thomson Learning, 2006, USA.
(ii) William F. Smith, William Smith, Foundations of Materials
Science and Engineering, 4th Edition, , McGraw Hill, 2006,
New York.
(iii) James F. Shackelford, Introduction to Materials Science for
Engineers, 7th Edition, , Prentice Hall, 2008, New Jersey.
EBS 110/2 - Engineering Drawing
Objective:
To give basic knowledge in drawing concept applicable to engineering.
Synopsis:
This course emphasizes on basic engineering design and drawings
through manual method and by using CAD software. It covers basic
methodology for traditional and concurrent design as well as basic
157
engineering graphic principles such as drawing size, line styles, texts,
conventional symbols, orthographic and isometric projection, multiview drawings, dimensioning, section, part list and assembly and
production drawings as well as standards in engineering drawing.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
Able to apply the knowledge of basic engineering design and
graphic principle in engineering field
Able to transform ideas to drawings according to acceptable
standards.
Able to produce engineering drawings using CAD
Mohd Razman Mainal et al Lukisan Kejuruteraan Asas. 2nd Edition
UTM Publication
Giesecke, F.E., Mitchell,A., Spencer,H.C,Hill,I.L., Dygdon, J.T.,
and Novak, J.E.2003. Technical Drawing,Twelfth Edition.Prentice
Hall. pp 702.
EBP 103/3 - Polymer Organic Chemistry
Objective:
To introduce and expose students to carbon compounds and organic
polymers, types of polymerization and general reactions of polymers.
Synopsis:
This course will focus on the carbon compounds and organic polymer.
Topics that will be covered include carbon compound and chemical
bonds, alcohols, ethers, unsaturated systems, aromatic compounds,
carboxylic acids, amine, phenols and aryl halides together with their
reactions structural analysis through FTIR spectroscopy. In addition,
the course will also covers classification of polymerization, types of
polymer synthesis, mechanism of free radical polymerization, cationic
polymerization,
anionic
polymerization
and
step-growth
polymerization, as well as general reaction of polymers.
Course
Outcomes:
• Classify the carbon compounds and their chemical bonds.
• Understanding of alcohols, ethers, unsaturated systems, aromatic
compounds, carboxylic acids, amine, phenols and aryl halides
together with their reactions structural analysis through FTIR
spectroscopy.
• Outline and explain the classification and reaction of chain-growth
polymerization
(free
radical
polymerization,
cationic
polymerization, anionic polymerization).
• Write and comprehends the general reaction of step-growth
polymerization and ring-opening polymerization.
158
References:
1. Solomon G. and Fryhle C., Organic Chemistry, 7th Ed, John Wiley,
2002.
2. Ger Challa, Polymer Chemistry: An Introduction, New York: Ellis
Horwood, 1993.
3. John W. Nicholson, The Chemistry of Polymers, Great Britain: The
Royal Society of Chemistry, 1991.
EBB 160/3 - Physical Chemistry of Engineering Materials
Objective:
Students are expected to be able to understand the basic concept of
thermodynamics, kinetics and electrochemistry.
Synopsis:
This course covers topics on introduction to thermodynamics, kinetics
and electrochemistry. The concepts of mass and energy conservation
(1st law) and reversibility (2nd law) applied to closed and open (control
volume) systems. Thermochemistry, stoichiometry, chemical
equilibrium, reaction kinetics. Relations between state functions and
their derivatives. Total differentials, partial differentials and their
meaning. Introductory description of thermodynamic energy functions
(U, H, A and G), departure functions and thermodynamic reference
states. Kinetics of reaction-effects of reactant and product
concentration, determination order of reaction, effect of temperature on
reaction kinetics, activation energy, catalysis. Electrolytes,
conductance, electrode potentials, Galvanic cell, determination of emf
electrode potential, thermodynamics of electrochemical cell, Nersnt
equation , Electrolysis, Faraday’s Law.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to understand the basic concepts of thermodynamics, kinetics
and electrochemistry.
Able to understand the concept of energy and its various forms.
Able to understand and be able to use constitutive relationships
relating state variables.
Able to apply their knowledge of thermodynamics, kinetics and
electrochemistry to materials and related problems.
Azizan, A., and Kamarudin, H., Pengenalan Kimia Metalurgi,
USM Penang, 1999.
Lee, H., Chemical Thermodynamics For Metals and Materials,
Imperial College Press,London, 1999.
Gaskell, David R., Introduction to Thermodynamics of Materials,
Taylor & Francis Books,London, 2003
159
EAS 152/3 - Strength of Materials
Objective:
To equip students with basic knowledge about fundamental principles
that governs the strength and stiffness of deformable bodies.
Synopsis:
Tension, compression and shear, Axially loaded bars, Torsionally
loaded circular bars, Laterally loaded beams, Deflection, Stress and
strain analysis, Columns.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Able to identify effect of axial, torsional and flexural loads on
stresses and deflection in deformable bodies(P1, A1).
Analyze stresses and deflection in deformable bodies under the
action of axial, torsional and flexural loads(C4, CTPS).
Evaluate the effect of axial, torsional and flexural loadings by
means of suitable diagrams and graphical means(A3, CTPS).
James M. Gere, Mechanics of Materials - 5th Edition,
Brooks/Cole, 2001.
Ferdinand P.Beer, E.Russell Johnston, Jr. and John
T.DeWolf,Mechanics of Materials, International Edition - 3rd
Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002.
William Nash, Strength of Materials - 4th Edition, Schaum’s
Outlines,McGraw-Hill, 1999
Russel C.Hibbeler, Mechanics of Materials – 4th edition, Prentice
Hall,1999.
Meor Othman Hamzah, Pengantar Analisis Struktur, Penerbit
Universiti Sains Malaysia, 1988.
EUM 114/3 – Advanced Engineering Calculus
Objective:
Synopsis:
This course covers the concepts of linear algebra, Fourier series, partial
differential equation and vector calculus. This course will provide
students with a variety of engineering examples and applications based
on the above topics
Linear algebra:
Determinants, inverse matrix, Cramer’s rule, Gauss elimination, LU
(Doolittle and Crout), eigen value and vector eigen, system of linear
equation, numerical method for solving linear equation: Gause Seidel
and Jacobian.
Fourier series:
Dirichlet condition, Fourier series expansion, function defined over a
finite interval, half- range cosine and sine series.
Vector Calculus:
160
Introduction to vectors, vector differentiation, vector integration: line,
surface and volume, Green’s, Stoke’s and Gauss Div theorems.
Partial differential equation:
Method for solving the first and second order PDE, linear and non
linear PDE, wave, heat and Laplace equations.
Course
outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Able to define the concept of linear algebra, Fourier series, partial
differential equation and vector calculus.
Able to understand and use the concept of linear algebra, Fourier series,
partial differential equation and vector calculus.
Able to use numerical methods for solving linear systems.
Able to apply the above concept for solving engineering problem.
References:
1. Glyn J.,(2010).Modern Engineering Mathematics, 4th Edition .Pearson
2.
Glyn, J.(2010).Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics, 4th
Edition .Pearson
3.
Ramana, B.V (2007) Higher Engineering Mathematics, 1st Edition.
Tata Mc Graw Hill
4.
Peter V. O’Neil (2007). Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics,
1st Edition .Thomson
5.
Ron Larson, Bruce H. Edwards (2009). Calculus, 9th Edition. Brook
ColeSteven
6.
Chapra, Raymond Canale (2009).Numerical Method for Engineers,6th
Edition. Mc Graw Hill
7.
D.Vaughan Griffith, I.M Smith (2006). Numerical Method for
Engineers, 2nd Edition. Chapman and Hall
8.
Kreiyzig, E.,(2010).
Edition.Wiley
9.
J.N.Sharma.(2007). Numerical Method for Engineers, 2nd Edition.
Alpha
Advanced
Engineering
Mathematics,10th
10. Smith R. T. and Minton, R., (2008), Calculus, 3rd edition, Mc Graw
Hill.
161
EML 101/2 – Engineering Practice
Objective:
To provide the exposure and basic knowledge of hands-on engineering
practices that includes the academic aspects as well as practical
trainings in learning and teaching of common engineering workshop
works and also to optimize the use of available resources in the
laboratory.
Synopsis:
Trainings are based on theoretical and practical concepts which consists
of manufacturing process; computer numerical control (CNC), lathe,
mill and thread machining, joint process, arc welding, gas welding and
MIG welding, metrology measurement, electric and electronic circuits,
and safety practice in laboratory and workshop.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Able to comply with the workshop procedures and safety
regulation.
Able to identify and to use common engineering tools in proper
and safe manners.
Able to produce engineering work-piece using the correct tools and
equipments within the time allocated.
Able to carry out accurate engineering measurement and label the
dimensions and tolerance.
Child, J.J., An Introduction to CNC Machining, Cassell
Computing, 1984.
Kalpakjan, S., Manufacturing Engineering and Technology, 3rd ed,
Addison Wesley, 1995.
Ibrahim Che Muda dan Ramudaram, N., Teknologi Bengkel
Mesin, 1995.
Ahmad Baharuddin Abdullah, Modul Kerja Amalan Kejuruteraan
(PPKM), 2005.
EEU104/3 – Electrical Technology
Objective:
This course introduces students to the fundamental concepts and
electrical elements. This course covers direct current (DC) circuit
analysis, alternate current (AC) one-phase circuit analysis, three-phase
AC circuit analysis, and electromagnetic circuits.
Synopsis:
Units, Definitions, Experimental Laws and Simple Circuits
System of units, charge, current, voltage, and power types of circuits
and elements. Ohm’s law, Kirchhoff’s laws, analysis of a single-loop
current, single node-pair circuit, resistance and source combination,
voltage and current division.
162
Circuit Analysis Techniques
Nodal and mesh analyses, linearity and superposition, source
transformations, Thevenin’s and Norton’s theorems.
Inductance and Capacitance
The V-I relations for inductor and capacitor, inductor and capacitor
combinations, duality, linearity and its consequences.
Source-free Transient Response of R-L and R-C Circuits
Simple R-L and R-C circuits, exponential response of source free R-L,
R-C circuits.
Response to Unit Step Forcing Function
Response of R-L and R_C circuits to unit step forcing functions.
Response to Sinusoidal Forcing Function
Characteristic of sinusoidal forcing functions, response of R-L and R-C
circuits to sinusoidal forcing functions.
Phasor Concept
The complex forcing function, the phasor, phasor relationships for R, L
and C, impedance and admittance
Average Power and RMS Values
Instantaneous power, average power, effective values of current and
voltage, apparent power and power factor, complex power.
Power System Circuits
An overview of single and three phase systems, wye and delta
configurations of three circuits, wye and delta transformations, and
power calculations in three phase systems.
Magnetic Circuits and Devices
Concept and laws of magnetism and analysis of transformers.
Introduction to electromechanical energy conversion, operation of
machines as generators and motors, power loss, efficiency and
operations at maximum efficiency.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
To understand basic quantity and unit definitions.
To understand the basic of electrical.
To understand the principle of DC circuit analysis.
To understand the principle of transient circuit analysis.
To understand the principle of AC circuit analysis.
To understand the principle of magnetic device, magnetic circuit
and transformer.
163
References:
1.
2.
3.
Huges, “Electrical and Electronic Technology”, 10th ed, Pearson
Prentice Hill, 2008.
Alexander and Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”, 3rd ed,
Mc Graw Hill, 2007.
Nilsson and Riedel, “Electric Circuits”, 8th ed, Pearson Education,
2008.
EBP 200/3 - Polymeric Materials
Objective:
To give earlier exposure to the students on basic knowledge related to
polymeric materials.
Synopsis:
This course covers topics on introduction to various polymers especially
on classification aspects and methods of polymerization. The course also
covers relationship between structures, properties and application as
engineering materials with specific conditions. It also discuss the
modifications of polymers; reinforcement, composites; processing,
rheological properties and viscoelastic concepts. It also covers the
examples of commercially available polymeric materials for instance
thermoplastic, thermoset, elastomer and latex for general and engineering
applications.
Course
Outcomes:
References:
• Recognize various polymers: thermoplastic, thermoset and
elastomer and differentiate polymer with other materials
• Explain the basic principles of polymers based on structureproperties-applications (e.g. thermal, mechanical and chemical
properties)
• Explain the basic concepts of various polymer applications and
encompass aspects of basic engineering for polymer processing
• Interpret and apply the materials issues, requirements and selection
for any given polymer engineering applications
1.
2.
3.
4.
J. F. Shackelford, Introduction to Materials Science for Engineers,
(sixth Edition), Pearson Prentice Hall, 2005
I. M. Ward and J. Sweeney, An Introduction to the mechanical
properties of solid polymers, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.
D. R. Askeland and P. P. Phule, The Science and Engineering of
Materials, (Fourth Edition) Thomson Books/Cole, 2003.
Hans-Georg Elias, An Introduction to Plastics, Wiley-VCH, 2003.
164
EBP 201/3 - Polymer Synthesis
Objective:
To introduce the concept of polymer synthesis which include kinetic
and mechanism, copolymerisation and specific reaction reactions in
synthesis of polymers.
Synopsis:
A discussion on condensation and addition polymerization, their
mechanisms and kinetics. Structural and chemical modification will be
introduced which include copolymerization and the use of specific
catalyst/system for control in molecular weight and tacticity.
Emphasize is made on reaction condition i.e. economic/cost, monomer
selection, stoichiometry, catalyst, solvent, additives and reaction
temperature. Polymerization system will be discussed namely bulk,
solution, gas-phase, suspension and emulsion polymerisation.
Experimental technique and experimental design at laboratory scale
will be discussed.
Course
Outcomes:
References:
• Understand the various types of polymer synthesis, their mechanism
and kinetics.
• Design synthetic route to polymer synthesis based on chemical and
physical properties.
• Decide the polymerization system for optimum output during polymer
synthesis.
• Appreciate the various factors affecting the experimental design in
polymer synthesis.
• Develop skill in literature review, communication (oral + written) and
result presentation
1.
2.
3.
Billmeyer, F. W., Jr. Textbook of Polymer Science, 3rd. ed., Wiley,
1984.
Odian, G., Principles of Polymerization, 3rd. ed., Wiley, 1991.
Saunders, K. J., Organic Polymer Chemistry, 2nd. ed., Chapman
and Hall, 1988.
EBP 202/3 - Polymer Structure
Objective:
For students to understand polymer structures, dimension of polymer
chain, transition theory, polymer molecule orientation and the
application of various microscopy techniques to investigate structures
of polymers.
Synopsis:
This course will focus on structure of polymers in their amorphous and
crystalline state. Topics that will be covered include polymer chain
dimensions, conformation, configuration and statistical analysis of
polymer chain. For the amorphous state, subjects such as five regions
of viscoelastic behaviour, glass transition theories, secondary
165
transitions and measurement methods for transitions in polymers will
be discussed. As for the crystalline state, topics including polymer
crystal structure, polymer crystallisation, melting of polymers and
methods of monitoring morphological changes will be covered, in
addition, topics regarding polymer molecular orientation and the use
several characterisation techniques such as microscopy and X-ray
diffraction in polymer studies will also be introduced.
Course
Outcomes:
References:
• Comprehend molecular-weight, polydispersity index, conformation and
configuration of the polymer chain.
• Describe theories of the glass transition, effects of Tg, five regions of
viscoelastic behaviour and methods of measuring transition in
polymers.
• Compare polymer crystal structure obtained from melt and solution,
and explain methods for polymer crystal structure determination.
• Derive Avrami’s equation for polymer crystallisation and apply the
equation for experimental techniques used in the study of polymer
crystallisation kinetics.
• List and describe types of microscopes for polymer microstructure
studies and comprehends the causes and effects of polymer molecular
orientation.
1.
2.
3.
Stephen L. Rosen, Fundamental Principles of Polymeric
Materials, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1993.
Sperling, L. H., Introduction to Physical polymer Science, John
Wiley & Sons, New York, 1992.
Painter, P. C. &. Coleman, M. M., Fundamentals of Polymer
Science - An Introductory Text, Technomic Lancaster, 1994.
EUP 222/3 - Engineers in Society
Objective:
To provide knowledge on ethics, management, law and financial
accounting related to engineering industry and the related framework
necessary for the effective conduct to the society and industry.
Synopsis:
This course provides exposure to students the fundamentals principles
of engineering ethics such as code of engineering ethics and the
responsibility of a professional engineer, basic law covering
introduction to Malaysian Laws, engineering accounts and basic
introduction to management theory.
Course
Outcomes:
•
Introduce the fundamental theoretical principles related to
engineering ethics, basic law for engineers, engineering accounting
and basic management.
166
•
•
References:
Practice the real understanding on the fundamental theoretical
principles related to engineering ethics, basic law for engineers,
engineering accounting and basic management.
Appreciate the importance of the fundamental theoretical
principles in actual construction industry.
1.
Abdul Aziz Hussin & Abdul Rashid Abdul Aziz, (2000), Aspek
Undang-undang Tort Dalam Projek Pembinaan, Pulau Pinang
Penerbit Universiti Sains Malaysia.
2. Akta Pendaftaran Jurutera dan Peraturan, 1967 (Pindaan
Sehingga 1998).
3. Boatright, J. R., (2000), ‘Ethics and The Conduct of Business’,
New Jersey, Prentice-Hall.
4. Dyson, J. R., (1999), ’Accounting for Non-Accounting Students,
London, Pitman Publishing.
5. Hairul Azhar Abdul Rashid, et. al., (2004), ‘Engineers in Society’,
Kuala Lumpur, McGraw Hill.
6. Harrison, W.T, & Horngren, C. T., (2001), ‘Financial Accounting’,
New Jersey, Prentice-Hall.
7. Jaafar Muhamad, (1999), ’Asas Pengurusan, Petaling Jaya, Fajar
Bakti.
8. Radford, J.D., (1998), ’The Engineer in Society’, London,
Macmillan.
9. Robbins, S.P., & Coulter, M, (2004), ‘Management’, New Jersey,
Prentice-Hall.
10. Shaik Mohd Noor Alam, (1998), ’Undang-undang Komersil
Malaysia’, Kuala Lumpur, Dewan Bahasa Pustaka.
11. Velasquez, M.G., (1998), ‘Business Ethics’, New Jersey, PrenticeHall.
12. Wu Min Aun, (2000), ‘Sistem Perundangan Malaysia’, Petaling
Jaya, Longman.
EBB 250/2 - Computer Methods for Engineers
Objective:
To give exposure about several vital computer techniques in engineering
- Visual Basic, Excel.
Synopsis:
The course covers the basic of programming related to engineering
environment. Visual Basic has been chosen as programming language
because of its easy to implement and its object oriented methods.
Students are also introduced to various concepts of programming logics,
types of data, decision making, procedural and advanced database
object. Fundamental of MySQL technique of implementation and data
linking are also covered.
167
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to explain the basic concept/principle in Visual Basic
programming.
Able to describe and apply the technology, types and
characteristics of structured programming.
Able to design and write a complete program under GUI(Graphical
User Interface) environment.
Able to assess a range of learning resources and to take
responsibility for own learning with appropriate support.
Able to explain and work effectively by the use of design program
to simplifies the work flow and data processing.
P.G McKeown, 2002, Learning to Program With Visual Basic (2nd
Ed.), John Wiley.
E. Newman, 1999, Programming with Microsoft Visual Basic 6.0:
An Object Oriented Approach, Thomas Publishing.
J. Hall, 1995, Teach Yourself Visual Basic, MIS Press. A range of
recent internet publications will be provided to cover new
techniques in programming.
EBP 204/3 - Elastomeric Materials
Objective:
To expose students to basic concept of rubber/elastomer processing,
type of elastomers and their classification, the behaviour of these
rubber/elastomers, type of fillers that are commonly used and also
testing on vulcanizate properties
Synopsis:
This course covers topics on visco-elastic concept and rubber elasticity,
raw rubber properties including plasticity, plastic retention index, and
Mooney viscosity. The course also covers types of rubber including
natural rubber, modified natural rubber, SBR, EPDM, IR, BR, CR,
NBR, CSM etc with their properties and applications. It also discusses
rubber curing and kinetic of vulcanization; curemeter and curing
characteristics such as scorch and cure time. It also covers about
crosslinks density measured using Mooney-Rivlin and Flory-Rehner
equations and their effects on properties, sulphur vulcanization and
other types of vulcanization systems such as peroxide, moisture,
radiation etc. Fillers and reinforcement. This course also covers the
different types of filler, factors which determine the degree of
reinforcement, the importance of filler dispersion and various
reinforcement theories. It also includes the vulcanizate testing and
interpretation: stress-strain, hardness, tearing, compression set, ageing,
fatigue, creep, stress relaxation, etc.
168
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Describe the fundamentals of rubber/elastomers processing and
explain an appreciation of intrinsic properties rubber/ elastomer
compounding ingredients and vulcanizations systems.
Defines and distinguish different types of elastomers and classify
their properties with rubber/ elastomer products applications.
Describe various types and classification of fillers in rubber
compounding and elaborate fillers will reinforce the rubber and
various reinforcement theories of rubber.
Explain the importance of various testing procedure of vulcanizate
properties of rubbers and analyze the suitability of each testing
procedure for different rubber products.
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Andrew Ciesielski, An Introduction to Rubber Technology, Rapra
Technology Ltd., 1999.
Werner Hofmann, Rubber Technology Handbook, Hanser
Publisher, 1989.
Maurice Morton, Rubber Technology, Van Nostrand Reinhold
Company, 1987.
Hanafi Ismail dan Azanam Shah Hashim, Pengenalan
Penyebatian dan Pemprosesan Getah, Penerbit USM, 1998.
EBP 207/2 - Transport Phenomena in Polymers
Objective:
To give exposure to students regarding transport phenomena and its
importance in Polymer Engineering field.
Synopsis:
The course covers the basic concepts of transport phenomena and its
application in Polymer Engineering. These include general equations
used in the discussion of transport phenomena such as Newton’s Law
on viscosity, Fourier’s Law for heat transfer and Fick’s Law on
diffusion process in polymer processing unit operation. Discussions on
heat transfer problem in polymer processing, for example,
plasticization / melting, product cooling process, its role in injection
moulding, heat generation due to “viscous dissipation”, etc., will be put
forward. Besides that, the role of mass transfer in Polymer Engineering
application and introduction to important transport properties will also
be covered.
Course
Outcomes:
• Identify transport properties that are important in Polymer
Engineering study
• Have knowledge regarding functions of transport properties in
Polymer Engineering applications
169
• Have knowledge about general equations that are essential in
transport phenomena for typical polymer processing techniques and
applications.
• Use simple mathematical models in explaining typical transport
phenomena occurring Polymer Engineering field.
• Solve transport phenomena problems such as heat and mass transfer
in processing techniques and polymer product applications.
References:
1. Bird, R.B., Stewart, .E. and Lightfoot, E.N., Transport Phenomena,
(2nd Edition), John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2002.
2. Agassant, J.-F., Avenas, P., Sergent, J.-Ph. and Carreau, P.J.,
Polymer Processing: Principles and Modeling, Hanser Publisher,
1991.
3. Wilkinson, A.N. and Ryan, A.J., Polymer Processing and Structure
Development, Kluwer Academic Publisher, 1998.
4. Tadmor, Z. and Gogos, C.G., Principles of Polymer Processing,
(2nd Edition), John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 2006.
5. Tucker III, C.L., Fundamentals of Computer Modeling for Polymer
Processing, Hanser Publisher, 1989.
EBP 212/3 - Latex Processing
Objective:
To enhance student knowledge on latex, methods of producing latex
products and to train students in problem solving related to latex
products.
Synopsis:
This course covers topics on introduction to latex types, class and
properties and various testing used to determine properties of latex. The
course also covers on how to understand a mechanism of film forming
from latex and factors that controls the film properties. It also includes
ingredient for compounding, preparation, techniques to measure curing
state and curing mechanism for latex compounds. The course also
includes the understanding of several techniques used to produce latex
products with the testing involved together with problem solving during
production of latex products. It also discuss problems with waste
generate during latex processing and steps to minimize the problems
and explain the allergy problems that exist because of latex compound
ingredients, n-nitrosoamine generate that evaporated, and protein
contents that can be absorbed in the latex products.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
Describe latex properties and apply various testing methods to
determine latex properties according to International standard
Understanding the latex compounding process and explain the
mechanism of latex films formation.
170
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Comprehend several techniques used to produce latex products,
testing and solve problems during production of latex products.
Explain latex allergy problems and discuss methods to reduce
protein content in latex.
Blackley, D.C., High Polymer Latices, Vol 1: Fundamental
Principles, Applied Science 1997.
Blackley D.C., High Polymer Latices, Vol 2: Types of Latices,
Applied Science 1997.
Blackley D.C., High Polymer Latices, Vol 3: Applications of
Latices, Applied Science 1997.
Roberts A.D., Natural Rubber Science & Technology, Oxford,
1988.
Calnert K.O., Polymer Latices & Their Applications, Applied
Science, 1980.
EBB 215/3 - Semiconductor Materials
Objective:
To introduce and expose the student to semiconductor materials
including their physical and chemical properties, and their applications
in semiconductor devices
Synopsis:
The course is divided into two parts. The first part (part I) is an
introduction of atomic model, bonding forces in solid, semiconductor
materials and the concept of energy band model in solids. Having
established the fundamental theory of crystals and some quantum
mechanics in Part I, the Part II takes a real semiconductor material as an
example and expand the above mentioned topics to deal with
semiconductor in equilibrium and non equilibrium, transport
phenomena in a semiconductor and the p-n junction which is the basic
building bock of semiconductor and optoelectronics devices.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Able to identify the differences between semiconductor, conductor
and insulator and bonding forces involved.
Able to classify semiconductor materials according to their nature
of current carrier, crystal structure and chemical compositions.
Able to explain the concept of energy band structure.
Able to define the charge carrier behaviour by applying the
knowledge from the energy band diagram.
Able to elucidate the transport phenomena in a semiconductor and
to perform current transport calculations.
Able to apply the knowledge on charge carriers behaviour to the
activity in a depletion region when a p-n junction is formed and to
explain the mechanism of carrier transport in a simple diode.
171
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Adir Bar-Lev, Semiconductors and Electronics Devices (2nd
Edition), Prentice Hall International (1984).
S.M. Sze, Semiconductor Devices, Physics and Technology, 2nd
Edition, John Wiley and Sons.
D. Neamen, Semiconductor Physics and Devices, 3rd Edition,
MacGraw Hill.
Anderson and Neamen, Fundamental of Semiconductor Devices,
McGraw Hill (2005).
EBP 216/2 - Polymer Engineering Laboratory
Objective:
To introduce students to polymer synthesis methods and techniques for
physical and chemical testing according to ASTM standard.
Synopsis:
This laboratory has been divided into 10 experiments that cover 14
weeks of laboratory work (total 56 hours of lab. hour).
Contents of these 10 experiments are as follows:
i. Polystyrene emulsion polymerization: Preparation of polystyrene
sample using emulsion polymerization and investigate the effects
of surfactant concentration on the rate of polymerization.
ii. Phenol-formaldehyde resin formation: Investigate resin
formation in acid or alkali conditions and to determine reaction
progress based on formation of free formaldehyde and study the
curing properties.
iii. Estimation of gel time and curing time for unsaturated
polyester: Investigation of curing reaction for commercial
unsaturated polyester resin by observing effects of curing agents
on the gel time and curing time.
iv. Synthesis and Study of chemical stability of Polyimide: To
synthesis a polyimide through condensation polymerisation,
performing step thermal curing and investigating chemical stability
test of the polymer in various solvents.
v.
Determination of Mv of polystyrene using Mark Houwink
equation: Solution viscosity of polystyrene synthesised from exp.
1 is used to determine its Mv using Mark Houwink equation.
vi. Cold drawing and anisotropy of polymeric materials: Isotropic
properties will be introduce to sample with isotropic property using
cold drawing. Anisotropy properties that exist will be studied.
vii. Annealing of polymeric materials: Polymer samples will be roll
using two roll mill and anisotropy conditions are introduced.
172
Sample will be annealed at temperature below melting temperature
and anisotropy properties will be studied.
viii. Flexural properties of polymeric materials: To investigate
flexure properties of polymeric materials by using cantilever beam.
ix. Creep properties of polymeric materials: To investigate creep
properties of polymeric materials.
Course
Outcomes:
x.
Impact strength of polymeric materials: Determination of
impact strength for polymeric materials by using falling weight
method with different condition.
•
Apply the techniques used in synthesis, measuring,testing and
fabricating polymeric materials.
Plan, design and construct experimental problems and apply an
international standard in all experiments.
Distinguish and analyze theories to support the discussions in all
experiments.
Create scientific report and recommend analytical approach to
solve the experimental problems.
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Shah, V., Handbook of Plastics Testing Technology, Wiley, 1999.
Crawford, R. J., Plastics Engineering, Pergamon Press, 1987.
Baird, R.J., Industrial Plastics: Basic Chemistry, Major Resins,
Modern Industrial Processes, Hanser Publisher, 1999.
Odian,G., Principles of Polymerization, John Wiley & Sons, 3rd
Ed, 1991
EBP 303/3 - Plastic Materials
Objective:
To introduce plastics and types of plastic, plastic compounding and
additives used in plastic compounding, plastic database, material
selection, the issue of plastic recycling, processing and properties of
different types of plastics.
Synopsis:
This course will discussed about plastic data base and material selection
(definition, software used etc.), specific plastic material, plastic
properties and applications, plastic compounding process and additives
(identification and selection of additives) and issues relating to
recycling of plastic materials.
Course
Outcomes:
•
Search, interpret and use information extracted from plastic data
base obtained from different sources (internet, books etc.)
173
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Explain compounding process, selection of additives and their
functions, understand compatibility issue and solve problems
relates to compounding
Explain the importance of plastic recycling, method of recycling
and aware of the impact of plastic waste on the environment
Recognize and interpret major structure property relationships for
plastic materials and their primary applications
Fried J., Polymer Science and Technology, Prentice Hall, 1995.
McCrum N. G., Buckley C. P., and Bucknall C. B., Principles of
Polymer Engineering, 2nd Ed., Oxford, 1997.
Van Krevelen D.W., Properties of Polymers, Elsevier, Amsterdam,
1997.
Young R.J. and Lovell P.A., Introduction to Polymers, 2nd Edition,
Chapman & Hall, 1991.
EBP 306/3 - Properties of Polymer Materials Engineering
Objective:
To give explanation to students regarding the fundamental aspect of
polymer physics that covers rubber elasticity, failure and yield and
fracture behaviours.
Synopsis:
This subject covers the fundamental aspect of polymer physics. It is
involve the stress-strain relationship viz definition, curve, temperature
and effect of strain rates. It also covers rubber elasticity including
network, thermodynamic, statistical theory of rubber elasticity,
elasticity network, stress-strain behaviour, network defects and
phenomenological theory. Deformation and yield behaviour for
instance necking and crazing failure and also molecular model rubber
reinforced plastic. It also discuss on linear viscoelastic viz stress
relaxation, Boltzmann superposition principal, creep test, timetemperature superposition conditions, relaxation behaviour. Besides
that polymer cracking for instance ductile-brittle change, strength
theory, Griffith theory, visco-elastic, mechanical failure, fatigue and
environmental stress cracking will be put forward. It also covers the
testing which includes the specification and sampling standard
procedure and finally testing techniques.
Course
Outcomes:
• Able to comprehend the stress-strain relationship viz definition,
curve, temperature and effect of strain rates. It also covers rubber
elasticity including network, thermodynamic, statistical theory of
rubber elasticity, elasticity network, stress-strain behaviour, network
defects and phenomenological theory.
• Able to understand deformation and yield behaviour for instance
necking and crazing failure and also molecular model rubber
174
reinforced plastic. Linear viscoelastic: stress relaxation, Boltzmann
superposition principal, creep test, time-temperature superposition
conditions, relaxation behaviour.
• Able to define and distinguish polymer cracking; ductile-brittle
change, strength theory, Griffith theory, visco-elastic, mechanical
failure, fatigue and environmental stress cracking. Testing;
specification and sampling standard procedure and testing
techniques.
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
R.J. Crawford, Plastic Engineering, 2nd Edition, Pergamon Press,
Oxford, England. (1992)
N.G. Mc Crum, C.P. Buckley & C.B. Bucknall, Principles of
Polymer Engineering, Oxford University Press, (1994)
L.R.G. Treloar, , The Physics of Rubber Elasticity, Clarendon Press,
Oxford, (1975)
R.J. Young and P.A. Lovell, Introduction to Polymers, 2nd Edition,
Chapman & Hall, London (1991)
EBP 308/3 - Rubber: Processing and Products
Objective:
To introduce the student various rubber processing techniques, various
types of synthetic rubber, rubber-rubber blends, rubber-plastic blends,
rubber waste recycling and various production of rubber products.
Synopsis:
Rubber processing - compounding techniques, molding and
vulcanization. Preparation, vulcanization and properties of synthetic
rubbers: butadiene, styrene butadiene, butyl, nitrile, ethylene propylene,
thermoplastic elastomer, silicone etc. Rubber products manufacture
such as tire, shoes, hose, household and engineering product. Rubber
compounds - compounding principal, factors that effecting compounds,
the used of compatible agent in compounds, co-vulcanization agents
and co-vulcanization behavior and several examples of compound
products. Rubber-plastic or thermoplastic elastomer compounds principal and aim, criteria for compounding, chemical/physics or mixed
compounds, rubber reinforced plastic, dynamic vulcanization and
several examples of TPE.
Rubber recycling - environmental
consideration, the need for recycling, latex products such as gloves, dry
rubber products such as tire etc. Research innovation- new rubbers,
novel vulcanization and rubber reinforcement, rubber compounds and
TPE with current recycling techniques.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
Able to describe various nomenclature and classification of
synthetic rubbers.
Able to elaborate the various types of synthetic rubbers, their
chemistry, compounding, vulcanizate properties and application.
175
•
•
•
•
•
Able to compare and outline the various blending techniques of
rubber-rubber blends and know how to choose the right technique
for each of rubber blend.
Able to compare and outline the various blending techniques of
rubber-rubber blends and know how to choose the right technique
for each of rubber blend.
Able to explain the importance of various recycling techniques of
rubber wastes and analyze the suitability of each technique in order
to recycle different sources of rubber wastes.
Able to describe the manufacturing of various products from
recycle rubber and write the flow chart of manufacturing process.
Able to compare and outline the manufacturing of various rubber
product for automotive industry applications, hydraulic, off-shore
engineering, tyre, sport products, hose, cable, shoes, etc.
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
John Scheirs, Polymer Recycling – Science, Technology and
Application, John Wiley and Sons, Chichester, 1998.
K. Nagdi, Rubber as An Engineering Material: Guideline for
users, Hanser, Munich, 1993.
A.K. Bhowmick et. al, Rubber Products Manufacturing
Technology, , Marcel Dekker, New York, 1994.
Hanafi Ismail, Pengitaran Semula Sisa-sisa Buangan Getah:
Kepentingan, Pendekatan dan Insentif, Siri Syarahan Umum
Profesor, Penerbit USM, Penang, 2005.
Hanafi Ismail et. al, Recycling of Rubber Wastes (chapter 13) in
Research at USM: Environmental Management and Engineering,
USM Publisher, Penang, 2004.
EBP 310/3 - Plastic Processing
Objective:
To expose students to various techniques to produce products from
plastics.
Synopsis:
The main focus of this course is to emphasize on the aspects of
technique to produce plastic product such as extrusion, extrusion blown
film, injection moulding and so forth including factors that control the
quality of plastic products.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
Able to explain injection moulding technique, materials, machine
design, processing parameters, solve problems related to defects in
production
Able to explain extrusion technique for polymer processing, screw
design, processing parameters, identify defects and solve problems
during processing
176
•
References:
Able to distinguish and explain other techniques used to produce
plastics products and identify testing and defects in plastics products
1.
2.
3.
4.
Chung, Extrusion of Polymers, Hanser, 2000.
Whelan A., Injection Moulding Machines, Elsevier, 1982.
Ray Jaques, Plastics and Technology, Cambridge University Press,
2000.
Olmsted, B. A and Davis, M. E., Practical Injection Moulding,
Marcel Decker, 2001.
EBP 320/2 - Rubber Laboratory
Objective:
To introduce the rubber processing techniques and also tests that should
be conducted on a rubber product.
Synopsis:
This course covers experiments involved in rubber processing and
testing. The experiments will involve on viscosity and plasticity of raw
rubber; processing of rubber involving with mixing and compounding;
curing; rubber vulcanization. Experiments also cover on rubber testing
that include tensile and tearing tests; hardness, resilience, compression
set, accelerated ageing and determination of cross-link density. It also
covers an experiment that comparing tensile properties and hardness
between natural rubber and synthetic rubber and effects of addition of
different fillers on hardness, resilience and compression set.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Able to apply the techniques used in mixing, compounding,
processing and testing of rubber.
Able to plan, design and construct experimental problems and
apply an international standard in all experiments.
Able to distinguish and analyze theories to support the discussions
in all experiments.
Able to create scientific report and recommend analytical approach
to solve the experimental problems.
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Barlow, F.W., Rubber Compounding: Principals, Materials and
Techniques, Marcell Dekker Inc, 1988.
Brown, R.P., Physical Testing of Rubbers, Rapra Technology ltd,
1992.
Khairi Nagdi, Rubber as Engineering Material: Guideline for
Users, Hanser Publishers, 1993.
Ismail, H. and Hashim, A.S., Pengenalan Penyebatian dan
Pemprosesan Getah, USM Publication, 1998
177
EBB300/3 : Engineering Statistics & Mathematical Modeling
Objective:
Strengthening knowledge and skills in mathematical modeling to
provide students in understanding engineering mathematics concepts
then able to formulate and solve engineering problems.
Synopsis:
This course covers the topics: The role of experimental design in
engineering fundamentals and applications of experimental design such
as sampling
distributions, data analysis, factorial design,
regression and correlation. Provide an understanding of the concept of
complex numbers. Provides
approaches to problem solving and
mathematical modeling rules.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Identified the factors of experimental design and links this
knowledge in the field of engineering applications
Recognizing patterns and procedures in experimental design
including defining problems, identifying the parameters of the
dependent and independent and analyze data
Applying the principles of regression and correlation of
engineering problems
Analyzing the problems of modeling, engineering and construction
of the factors in a mathematical modeling in engineering
Formulate engineering problems and the solution in the form of
mathematical modeling
Douglas C. Montgomery, (2009), Design and Analysis of
Experiments, Wiley, 7th
Edition.
Diran Basmadjian, Ramin Farnood, (2006), The Art of Modeling
in Science and Engineering with Mathematica, Second Edition,
Chapman & Hall/CRC
Douglas C. Montgomery, Scott M. Kowalski, (2010), Design and
Analysis of Experiments: MINITAB Companion, Wiley, 7th
edition.
Edward B. Magrab, Shapour Azarm, Balakumar Balachandran,
James Duncan, Keith
Herold, Gregory Walsh,(2011), An
Engineers Guide to Matlab, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall.
Kreiyzig, E., (2010). Advanced Engineering Mathematics,10th
Edition, Wiley
Ramana,B.V., (2007) Higher Engineering Mathematics, 1st
Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill.
EUP 301/3 - Engineering Management
Objective:
To extend students’ knowledge and understanding of the direction and
operation of organization in areas of human resources management,
marketing management and engineering economics.
178
This course is also meant to develop students’ ability to provide
analysis and commentary to make decisions of work tasks in
engineering activities.
Synopsis:
Course
Outcomes:
References:
This course introduces the students of the basics of fundamentals of
theoretical principles of human resource management, marketing
management and engineering economics.
Students are
• Introduced the fundamental theoretical principles related to human
resources management, marketing management and engineering
economics.
• Able to analysis current economic environment to make effective
decision making.
• Able to appreciate the importance of the basics of fundamentals of
theoretical
principles
implementing
actual
engineering
management.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bayliss, J.S., (1999), Marketing For Engineers, Prentice-Hall.
Blythe, J., (2001), ‘Essentials of Marketing’, Essex,FinancialTimes Prentice Hall.
Egan, J., (2001), ‘Relationship Marketing’, New Jersey, PernticeHall.
Keat P. & Young, (2001), ‘Managerial Economics For Decision
Makers’, Macmillan.
EBP 307/2 - Polymer Rheology
Objective:
To give students knowledge regarding the basic principles of polymer
rheology and the role of polymer rheology in polymer processing.
Synopsis:
This course will introduce students to viscoelastic nature of polymers
and its association with polymer rheological behaviour which
subsequently has significant roles in polymer processing. The subject
will also focus on factors affecting the rheological behaviour of
polymeric materials such as types of materials, polymer composition
and process parameters. In addition, specific rheological behaviour of
polymer for example, Newtonian, pseudoplastic, dilatant, etc will be
discussed in certain components of the course. Instruments for
measurement or characterization of polymer rheological behaviour and
the viscoelastic phenomena of polymer fluid like extrudate swell and
flow instabilities will also be covered in this course.
179
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Have basic knowledge of the fundamental principles underlying
fluid mechanics, rheology, and polymer melt processing.
Able to identify several types rheological instruments commonly
used in rheological study of polymer melt.
Able to apply superposition technique when given actual
experimental data in constructing mastercurves.
Able to list viscoelastic phenomena displayed by polymeric
materials and explain the factors that influenced their occurrence.
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Brydson J. A., Flow Properties of Polymer Melts, Wiley, 1985.
Gupta, R.K., Polymer and Composite Rheology, Marcel Dekker,
2000.
White, J.L., Principles of Polymer Engineering Rheology, WileyInterscience, New York, 1990.
Crawford, R.J., Plastics Engineering, 3rd Edn., ButterworthHienemann, New York, 1998.
EBP 316/2 - Latex Laboratory
Objective:
To train students the various test methods used to control the quality of
natural rubber latex.
Synopsis:
This course covers experiments involved in latex processing and testing.
The experiments involved basic test methods to determine latex quality
in their chemical composition, colloid stability, and physical properties
according to ISO standard. Experiments also cover preparation of latex
compound, manufacturing of products from latex using dipping
methods and test methods to determine mechanical properties of the
latex products. It also covers an experiment that investigates the effects
of pre-vulcanization time, fillers and leaching on the tensile properties
of latex films.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
Able to apply and familiarize the test methods used to evaluate
latex quality and latex films properties
Able to plan, design and construct experimental problems and
apply an international standard in all experiments.
Able to distinguish and analyze theories to support the discussions
in all experiments.
Create scientific report and recommend analytical approach to
solve the experimental problems.
Blackley D. C., High Polymer Latices, Vol 1: Fundamental
Principles, Applied Science 1997.
180
2.
3.
4.
5.
Blackley D. C., High Polymer Latices, Vol 2: Types of Latices,
Applied Science 1997.
Blackley D. C., High Polymer Latices, Vol 3: Applications of
Latices, Applied Science 1997.
Roberts A. D., Natural Rubber Science & Technology, Oxford,
1988.
Calnert K. O., Polymer Latices & Their Applications, Applied
Science, 1980.
EBP 317/3 - Advanced Composite Composites
Objective:
To introduce polymer composites from the aspects of materials,
processing, and characteristics. To introduce various fundamentals of
mechanical theories of composites. Various aspects of testing of
polymer composites are also emphasized.
Synopsis:
Composites material: history and classification, polymer composites.
Polymer matrix: types of matrix, selection criteria. Inter-phase:
bonding mechanisms, inter-phase treatment. Fabrication techniques:
Type of fabrication techniques, selection criteria.
Composites
mechanic: stiffness, strength and elasticity for fiber reinforced
composites. Environmental effects: moisture effect, solvent and
chemical effect, thermal and thermo-oxidative. Testing and quality
assurance: destructive and non-destructive testing, quality assurance.
Design protocol and product development.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Able to classify the different choices of matrices and fibers and
their properties as and describe the importance of fiber-matrix
interface in controlling composite properties
Able to calculate and predict the mechanical properties of a
composite based on the properties of the constituents for both
continuous and short fiber composites.
Able to explain the major polymer composite processing methods
and identify a suitable processing method for a given polymer
composite from its physical properties and end-use application.
Able to explain the importance of non-destructive evaluation and
describe various non-destructive testing used to determine defects
in composite structural components.
References:
1.
2.
3.
F.L. Matthews, R.D. Rawlings, Composite Materials; Engineering
and Science, Chapman & Hall, 1994.
D. Hull and T.W. Clyne, An Introduction to Composite Materials,
Cambridge University Press, 1996.
Harper C.A., Handbook of Plastics, Elastomer and Composites,3rd
ed., Mc Graw Hill, New York, 1996.
181
4.
Tsu-Wei Chon, Editor., Materials Science and Technology, Vol
13. Properties of Composites, VCH Publisher New York, 1993.
EBP 324/3 - Polymer Degradation and the Environment
Objective:
To introduce and expose students to types of polymer degradation,
stabilization of polymers and management of polymer waste
Synopsis:
This course will focus on polymer degradation and environment. Topics
that will be covered include separation and sorting technique, size
reduction of waste plastics, recycling of various plastics, feedstock
recycling and Insineration of waste plastics with energy recovery. In
addition, topics regarding polymer degradation and stabilization,
weathering and biodegradation of polymers will also be introduced.
Course
Outcomes:
• Describe various sorting, separation, and size reduction technique of
waste plastic materials.
• Outline the importance of recycling waste plastic materials, and
manufacturing of new plastic products from waste plastics.
• Explain mechanism of degradation (thermal degradation,
photodegradation, biodegradation, weathering) and its related
stabilization of polymers.
• Discuss the measurement and assessment of polymer degradation
and stabilization.
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
John Scheirs (1998) Polymer Recycling- Science, Technology and
Application, Chichester: John Wiley and Sons.
Manas Chandra and Salil K. Roy (1998) Recycling of Polymers in
Plastic Technology Handbook, 3rd Edition, New York: Marcel
Dekker.
La Mantia F.P. (1993) Recycling of Plastic Materials, Canada:
Chemtec Publishing.
Gerald Scott (1999) Polymers and The Environment, Cambridge:
The Royal Society of Chemistry.
EBB 342/3 - Quality Control and Management
Objective:
To develop students knowledge on quality concepts, control,
improvement, and management.
Synopsis:
This course presents knowledge and demonstrates skills necessary to
structure, manage, maintain, and improve quality of an organization.
Topics include: Introduction to quality, management aspects of quality,
statistical methods to control and improve quality, and concept of
reliability.
182
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Able to describe and apply the philosophies of quality
management.
Able to apply various effective statistical methods to monitor,
control and improve quality.
Able to explain the concept of reliability of a product.
D.H. Besterfield, Quality Control, 7th Edn, Prentice Hall, New
Jersey, 2004.
H.M. Wadsworth, K.S. Stephens, and A.B. Godfrey, Modern
Methods for Quality Control and Improvement, Wiley, New York,
2002.
D.C. Montgomery, Introduction to Statistical Quality Control, 5th
Edn, Wiley, New York, 2005.
H.S. Gitlow, A.J. Oppenheim, R. Oppenheim, and D.M. Levine,
Quality Management, 3rd Ed., McGraw-Hill, Singapore, 2005.
EBP 314/3 - Resin Manufacturing
Objective:
To introduce factors that need to be considered in the production of
resin starting from plant design to manufacturing, compounding
processes, resin properties and resin applications.
Synopsis:
Plant design: Introduction to plant design, development process of plant
design, general considerations for designing, material selection and
fabrication. Manufacturing, compounding, processing, characteristics
and application for (1) thermoset resins such as alkyd, phenolic,
aminoplast, polyester, epoxy, polyurethane, and silicone; (2)
commercial and engineering thermoplastic resins such as polyolefin,
vinyl, polystyrene and copolymer, polyamide, synthetic rubber; (3)
specialty polymeric resins and heat resistance types such as polyimide,
polybenzimidazole, LCP and others.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
List down and explain the concept and heuristics in plant design
together with the general guide line required in the execution of a
project which serves as the starting point for more advance design
stage.
Classify and interpret the feed materials used in producing
different types of polymeric resin which differed extensively in
their end properties for a very wide diversity of applications.
Predict and derive the manufacturing general flow process of
various techniques in producing polymeric resin and the selection
preference of the techniques base on commercial requirement.
Derive and propose an improvement in the resin manufacturing
optimization efficiency through the utilization of various recovery
technologies.
183
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Coates, P. D. (editor), Polymer Process Engineering, London, Inst.
of Materials, 2001.
Kumar Anil, Rakesh K. Gupta, Fundamentals Of Polymer
Engineering, 2nd ed. New York: Marcel Dekker, Inc., 2003.
Rodriguez, Ferdinand, [et al.] Principles of Polymer Systems 5th
ed., London: Taylor & Francis, 2003.
Brydson J. A., Plastic Materials, 7th. ed., Butterworth, 1999.
EBP 350/5 - Industrial Training
Objective:
To give students experience regarding real working environment in
related industries
Synopsis:
Students will get their placement at various industrial sectors related to
polymer engineering. This is a ten-week industrial training during long
vacation i.e. after the second semester final examination (third year
level). They should experience the real exposure as an engineer in this
field. Students will be given training on various aspects such as
analysis, design, management, quality control and economy, which
related to their career as a polymer engineer. This is a compulsory
training.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
Able to practice the responsibility of becoming an engineer in the
profession of engineering.
Able to instill communication skill in engineering which include
daily interaction with working environment and technical writing.
EBP 400/3 - Product Design and Failure Analysis
Objective:
To give students knowledge on important aspects in polymer product
design, fundamental concept and analysis of polymeric materials
properties
Synopsis:
This course will focus on important aspects of designing polymer
product in terms of definition, fundamentals concepts and analysis of
polymeric materials behaviour. Design consideration, especially in
designing polymer products such as structural/mechanical,
processing/manufacturing and assembly requirements, will also be the
main issues that will be addressed in this course. Furthermore, this
subject will also include topics in failure analysis of polymer products.
Types of failures in polymer product and measurement and/or
characterisation of properties that are associated with the failures will
be some of the key focus in this subject. The course will also emphasise
on the use computer-aided tools/software in both polymer product
design and failure analysis.
184
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
Able to identify types of polymer and its importance in designing
polymer product
Able to evaluate design considerations, structural analysis and
types of assembly method that should be taken into account in
polymer product design.
Able to define failure analysis of polymer products and identify
factors affecting their failure.
Able to list types of experimental failure analysis and conduct
them in investigating failures in polymer product
Able to conduct a failure analysis on actual case of polymer
product failure and prepare a comprehensive failure analysis
report.
References:
1. N. Rao & K. O’Brien; Design Data for Plastics Engineers; Hanser
Publishers, Munich, 1998.
2. E. Miller; Plastics Products Design Handbook, Part A: Materials and
Components, Marcel Dekker Inc., New York.
3. H. Belofsky; Plastics: Product Design and Process Engineering, Hanser
Publishers, Munich. 1995.
4. Shah, V., Handbook of Plastics Testing Technology, John Wiley & Sons,
New York, 1998.
EBP 415/3 - Fiber Processing
Objective:
To introduce students to polymeric materials normally used to make
fibers, process involved in making fibers and fiber applications
Synopsis:
Introduction to fiber: classification and definition. Introduction to fiber
forming polymers. Processing and manufacturing of fiber: polymer
solubility, preparation of spinning solution, fiber formation, wet
spinning, dry spinning and melt spinning. Fiber after modification:
coloring, finishing, lubricating and others. Fiber drawing processes:
stretching and orientation as well as drawing techniques. Thermal
treatment: techniques of thermal treatment and effect of thermal
treatment on fiber properties.
Fiber properties: geometrical
characteristics of structure, physical, chemical and factors that
influence fiber properties. Product and fiber applications.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
Describe of the fundamental requirements of fiber-forming
polymers and the structure-property relationships for polymeric
fibers.
Compare and contrast the major types of polymeric fibers and
their applications
185
•
•
Classify and interpret the feed materials used in producing
different types of polymeric fiber which differed extensively in
their end properties for a very wide diversity of applications
Predict and derive the manufacturing general flow process of
various techniques in producing polymeric fiber and the selection
preference of the techniques base on commercial requirement
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Nakamura, A., Fiber Science and Technology, Enfield, Science
Publishers, Inc. 2000.
Warner, S. B., Fiber Science, Prentice Hall, 1995.
Lewin, M. Handbook of fiber science and technology, Marcel
Dekker, 1983.
Ziabick, A. High-speed fiber spinning: science and engineering
aspects, Wiley, 1985.
Phyllis G. Tortora, Billie J. Collier, Understanding Textiles (Fifth
edition), 1997.
EBP 418/2 - Plastic Laboratory
Objective:
To introduce techniques for compounding, processing and testing of
plastic materials
Synopsis:
The course contains 10 experiments that cover various types of polymer
processing and compounding techniques for both thermoplastic and
thermosets. In this course, several characterization techniques will be
conducted by students in order to evaluate parameters that are
investigated in each experiment.
Experiment 1: Studies on polymer melt flow - To measure and study
the melt flow behavior of polymer, and its relationship with polymer
processing parameter.
Experiment 2: Shrinkage and warpage analysis of injection
moulded products using cadmould software - To understand and
evaluate the effect of processing parameters on shrinkage and warpage
of injection moulded products using Cadmould simulation software.
Experiment 3: Preparation of poly(vinyl chloride) compounds - To
prepare and characterize the inorganic filler filled PVC compounds
Experiment 4: Studies on extrusion technique - To study the effects
of extrusion processing parameter on the melt flow and quality for
extrudate.
Experiment 5: Studies on blow film extrusion - To study the effects
of blow molding processing parameter on the mechanical properties of
thermoplastic film.
186
Experiment 6: Thermoforming of thermoplastics - To study the
concept of thermoforming and determine the optimum processing
condition of thermoplastics.
Experiment 7: Polymer identification - To identify polymeric
materials by using simple technique
Experiment 8: Studies on injection molding - To determine the
optimum cooling time of injection-molded thermoplastic samples.
Experiment 9: Plastics compounding by internal mixer - To
determine the factors that influences the effectiveness of plastic
compounding process by internal mixer
Experiment 10: Preparation of thermoset composites - To prepare
and characterize the properties of thermoset composites.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
Able to identify types of processing equipments that could
respectively produce thermoplastic and thermoset products.
Able to apply knowledge obtained from theoretical courses in
order to conduct experiments on plastics processing, compounding
and polymer characterisation.
Able to discuss and explain process parameters involve in plastics
processing and compounding.
Able to analyse experiment results and produce technical report
that fulfill course requirement.
Anil Kumar, Rakesh K. Gupta, Fundamentals of Polymer
Engineering, 2nd ed., New York, Marcel Dekker, Inc., 2003.
Osswald, T. A., Polymer Processing Fundamentals, Hanser, 1998.
EBP 420/2 - Rubber Engineering
Objective:
To introduce students to fundamental principles of rubber engineering
and design of several rubber products.
Synopsis:
The main focus of this course covers an application of mathematics in
rubber elasticity including classical, statistical, and phenomological
theory. It also covers an effects of reinforcement on Young’s, shear,
and bulk elasticity moduli and concept and behavior of forcedeformation including compression, shear, combined compression and
shear, torque, bending and buckling. The course also covers the effects
of structure and lamination; models of inclined rubber mounting and
slender column and application in bridge bearing, dock fender, and
187
others. It also include dynamic mechanical behavior with storage and
loss modulus, tan δ, damping and hysteresis, vibrate isolation and
transmissibility. The course also covers about the strength and
mechanical fatigue of rubbers, tire as a engineering product which
include wet grip, rolling resistance and application of finite elements
analysis (FEA) in prediction of rubber engineering products.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Explain the fundamentals principles of rubber engineering and
rubber elasticity
Describe and apply the concepts and behaviour of forcedeformation in rubber products.
Determine an appreciation of intrinsic properties of engineering
with rubbers focusing on dynamic mechanical properties and
fracture mechanics behaviour.
Differentiate and explain the basic principles of rubber
engineering products (shear and compression bearings, vibrations
and noise control, Raykin fenders, anti-vibrations mounting and
vibration isolations
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Alan Gent, Engineering with Rubber: How to design rubber
components, 2nd edition, Hanser Publishers, 2000
Anil K. Bhowmick, Malcolm M. Hall and Henry A. Benarey,
Rubber Products Manufacturing Technology, Marcel Dekker, Inc,
1994
P.B. Lindley, Engineering design with Natural Rubber, 5th
Edition, The Malaysian Rubber Producers’ Research Association,
1992.
P.K. Freakley and A.R. Payne, Theory and practice of engineering
with rubber, Applied Science Publisher LTD, 1988
EBB 245/3 - Materials Characterization
Objective:
To give some introduction to materials characterisation methods in
theory and applications.
Synopsis:
This course is on materials characterization techniques from the
theoretical aspect, instrumentation and applications. It covers three
topics: (a) Microstructural Analysis (optical microscope, SEM, TEM
and SPM), (b) Thermal Analysis (TGA, DTA, DSC, DTMA and TMA)
and (c) Spectroscopy: phases and surface analysis (molecular
spectroscopy (infra red and Raman), atomic spectroscopy (absorption
and emission), x-ray techniques (XRF and XRD) and introduction to
surface analysis and ion spectroscopy (SIMS and Auger electron
spectroscopy).
188
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Able to comprehend the concept of materials characterization
including the theory, working principle and application.
Able to select and apply the suitable technique (s) for properties’
characterization of materials in any application.
Able to analyze the characterization results qualitatively and
quantitatively.
Able to correlate between the microstructure and chemical
composition to the material properties.
Able to determine materials based on the characterization results.
Braun, R.D., Introduction to Instrumental Analysis, McGraw Hill
1997.
Erwing, G.W., Instrumental Method of Chemical Analysis 5th
Edition, McGraw Hill International 1985.
Christian, G.D., Analytical Chemistry 5th Edition, John Wiley &
Sons 1994.
Cullity, B.D. and Stock, S.R., X-Ray Diffraction 3rd Edition,
Pearson Education International 2001.
EBB 323/3 - Semiconductor Fabrication Technology
Objective:
To introduce about silicon wafer production technology and integrated
circuits.
Synopsis:
This course focuses on the major process technologies used in the
fabrication of integrated circuits (ICs) and other semiconductor devices.
Each lecture topic covers important scientific aspects of silicon wafer
processing steps. Topics include: crystal growth and wafer preparation,
crystal purification techniques, contamination control, oxidation,
diffusion, ion implantation, lithography, thin film deposition
technology, etching, metallization, process integration, electronic
packaging and yield.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
References:
1.
Able to explain contamination control in semiconductor industries.
Able to describe a process of developing semiconductor devices
and integrated circuits.
Able to describe and explain types of operations sequence in a
semiconductor device and integrated circuit fabrication process.
Able to distinguish, compare, and justify different types of
techniques used in different process steps.
Able to illustrate a simple semiconductor-device fabrication
process flow.
S. A. Campbell, The Science and Engineering of Microelectronic
Fabrication, Oxford, New York, 1996.
189
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.S. May and S.M. Sze, Fundamentals of Semiconductor
Fabrication, Wiley, New Jersey, 2004.
J.D. Plummer, M.D. Deal, and P.B. Griffin, Silicon VLSI
Technology: Fundamentals, Practice, and Modeling, Prentice Hall,
New Jersey, 2000.
P.V. Zant, Microchip Fabrication: A Practical Guide to
Semiconductor Processing, McGraw-Hill, New York, 2000.
W.D. Brown, Advanced Electronic Packaging, IEEE Press, New
York, 1999.
EBB 398/3 - Occupational Safety and Health
Objective:
To give exposure to students about the health and safety requirement in
industry.
Synopsis:
Introduction to holistic and global occupational safety and health
(OSH) engineering concepts towards efficient industrial development,
significance of occupational safety and health in quality assurance,
complemented by professional and ethical responsibilities towards
safety in the industry. Major course components towards competence
in occupational safety and health engineering include importance of
OSH in national development, OSH legislation, benefits of OSH
training and professionalism, OSH management policies and protocols,
OSH performance monitoring, OSH assessment and audit techniques,
hazard identification, risk assessment and implementation of safe
worksite practices.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
References:
1.
2.
3.
Able to identify, explain and determine the various factors
affecting the selection of appropriate occupational safety and
health (OSH) concepts and techniques.
Able to formulate, evaluate and design an effective occupational
safety and health (OSH) techniques towards efficient industrial
development at worksites in the public and industrial sectors.
Able to function as a multi-discipline team, complemented with
effective communication skills, to identify, apply and describe the
application of occupational safety and health (OSH) engineering
knowledge towards effective industrial development worldwide.
Kelloway, E.K., Francis, L. and Montgomery. Management of
Occupational Health and Safety, Canada: Thomson-Nelson, 2006
Goetsch, D.L., Occupational Safety and Health, New Jersey:
Pearson-Prentice Hall, 2005.
Long, G., Goh, E.K.H. and Muhd M.N., Smart Partnerships,
Malaysia: Malaysia Quarries Association-IQM-MCM, 2005.
190
EBP 401 - Final Year Research Project
Objective:
To train students in the aspect of planning and implementing a research
project as well as writing a project dissertation.
Synopsis:
This course offers platform for students to enhance their knowledge in
Polymer Engineering which have been acquired prior to this course.
Each student is given a title for an individual research project. Research
components that are covered in this course include conducting literature
review, analysis of previous work on the given title, research
experimental design, experimental set up and executing the
experimental work itself. Data collection and analysis, discussion,
report writing will be addressed when students prepare their final
dissertation. Lastly, the students will be tested with an oral presentation
where each student is required to present and defend their research
findings in front of a panel of examiners.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
•
Able to understand the background of the topics of research given
or proposed.
Able to know the references, tools or instrument required to
undertake the research.
Able to create innovativeness of the students in undertaking
problems faced in research.
Able to understand the appropriate format in writing a research
report.
Able to analyse the findings and its usefulness related to polymer
engineering or general engineering.
References:
1.
J. E. Mauch and N. Park, Guide to the Successful Thesis and
Dissertation: A Handbook for Students and Faculty, Marcel
Dekker, New York, 2003.
2.
William E. Russey, Hans Friedrich Ebel, Claus Bliefert, How to
Write a Successful Science Thesis: The Concise Guide for
Students, Wiley-VCH, 2006
EBP 402/3 - Mould and Die Design
Objective:
To introduce students with mould and die design techniques in
producing polymer products
Synopsis:
Selection criterion for selecting materials for mould and die which
include design criterion and detailed analysis using computer design
software; design of 2-plate mould, multiple-plate mould, runnerless
mould, side core etc.; die design to produce rod, tube, sheet and profile
191
will be put forward. Flow characteristics in mould and gate;
calculations of parameters for mould feed system, force to eject
product, distortion of product wall, and the variables for mould cooling
will be discussed. Flow characteristics in die, pressure gradient, die
dimensions, and output of die will also be discussed. Designing of
mould or die for a specific polymer product using manual technique
and computer (CAD) will be introduced.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
•
•
Identify types of extrusion dies and moulds used in producing
polymer product using extrusion and injection moulding
technique.
Evaluate design considerations of an extrusion dies for solid and
hollow product, annular, extruded profile and foamed products.
Evaluate design considerations of an injection mould for different
types of products.
Experience and apply practical die and mould design activities
using computer-aided design software.
References:
1.
2.
3.
4.
W. Michaeli, Extrusion Dies for Plastics and Rubber, Hanser,
New York, 1992.
C. Rauwendaal, Polymer Extrusion, Hanser, New York, 1986.
J.F. Agassant, P. Avenas, J.P. Sergent & P.J. Carreau, Polymer
Processing: Principles and Modeling, Hanser, New York, 1991.
B. A. Olmsted & M. E. Davis, Practical Injection Moulding,
Marcel Dekker, 2001.
EBP 412/3 - Specialty Engineering Polymer
Objective:
To introduce several type of polymers used in special applications
including electrical/electronic, medical and advanced engineering
fields. Relationship between structure and properties will be discussed
as well as the processing methods that involve advanced technology.
Synopsis:
This course is focused on few types of specialty polymers which are
used for specialized applications, such as fluoropolymers, liquid crystal
polymers, biodegradable polymers, polymers for electronic and medical
applications and polymer used in heavy engineering applications. The
correlation of the structure, processing, properties and applications of
various types of specialty polymers are also presented in the course.
Course
Outcomes:
•
•
Able to classify types of polymeric materials used in specialty
applications.
Able to correlate the structure and properties of the specialty
polymer with its applications.
192
•
Able to determine suitable processing technique of specialty
polymers for typical applications.
1.
Shalaby W, Karen J.L. (editor), Absorbable and Biodegradable
Polymers, Boca Raton: CRC Press, 2004.
Leo O’Connor, Conductive Polymers: Ease of Processing
Spearheads and Commercial Success, Wiley, John & Sons, 2001.
Brydson J.A., Plastics Materials, 5th ed. Butterworth, 2000.
Bansi D. Malhotra, Handbook of Polymer in Electronics, RAPRA
Technology Ltd., 2002.
References:
2.
3.
4.
193
INDEX
Advanced Engineering Calculus 70
Advanced Material and Composites 91
Advanced Polymer Composites 181
Analytical Chemistry 131
Applied Metallurgy 96
Blasting Technology 142
Comminution and Sizing 125
Computer Methods for Engineers 74
Corrosion and Degradation 89
Crystallography and Bonding in Solids 73
Design and Development of Ceramic Products 102
Elastomeric Materials 168
Electrical Technology 71
Engineering Calculus 64
Engineering Drawing 68
Engineering Geology 115
Engineering Management 85
Engineering Materials 66
Engineering Materials Characterization 76
Engineering Materials Introduction Laboratory 67
Engineering Mechanics 65
Engineering Polymers 80
Engineering Practice 73
Engineering Statistics 86
Engineers in Society 76
Environmental Chemistry for Engineering Practice 144
Environmental Engineering 141
Engineering Geophysics 138
Failure Analysis and Non Destructive Testing 95
Fiber Processing 185
Final Year Research Project (Material) 100
Final Year Research Project (Mineral Resources) 143
Final Year Research Project (Polymer) 191
Fluid Mechanics 88
Fluid Power and Turbo Machinery 102
Geomatic Engineering 122
Geomechanics 139
Hydrometallurgy 130
Industrial Minerals 141
Industrial Training (Material) 95
Industrial Training (Mineral Resources) 139
Industrial Training (Polymer) 184
Introduction to Mining Engineering 125
Latex Laboratory 180
194
Latex Processing 170
Materials Characterization Laboratory 77
Materials Processing Laboratory 90
Materials Selection and Design 101
Materials Thermodynamic 75
Materials Transport Engineering 134
Mechanical Metallurgy 84
Microscopy Laboratory 82
Mine and Plant Design 140
Mineral Chemistry Laboratory 133
Mineral Deposits 121
Mineral Economics 136
Mineral Processing Engineering Laboratory 137
Mineralogy 121
Mining Engineering Laboratory 124
Mining Methods and Law 129
Mould and Die Design 191
Nanomaterials 93
Occupational Safety and Health 94
Petrography & Ore Microscopy 126
Petroleum Engineering 143
Physical Chemistry of Engineering Materials 69
Physical Metallurgy 81
Physical Mineral Processing 131
Plastic Laboratory 186
Plastic Materials 173
Plastic Processing 176
Polymer Degradation and the Environment 182
Polymer Engineering Laboratory 172
Polymer Organic Chemistry 158
Polymer Rheology 179
Polymer Structure 165
Polymer Synthesis 165
Polymeric Materials 164
Product Design and Failure Analysis 184
Properties of Polymer Materials Engineering 174
Prospecting Geochemistry 135
Pyrometallurgy 92
Quality Control and Management 91
Raw Materials and Structural Ceramics 78
Resin Manufacturing 183
Rubber Engineering 187
Rubber Laboratory 177
Rubber: Processing and Product 175
Semiconductor Devices and Opto-Electronics 98
Semiconductor Fabrication Technology 88
Semiconductor Materials 79
195
Specialty Engineering Polymer 192
Strength of Materials 69
Technical Ceramics 97
Technology and Application of Engineering Polymer 99
Transport Phenomena in Polymers 169
Transport Processes 87
Whiteware and Glasses 83
196
STUDENTS’ FEEDBACK
The aim of this feedback form is to obtain students’ response regarding the content of this
guidebook. This information will be useful for the university in improving this guidebook.
Please respond to items 1 - 5 below based on the following 4-point scale.
1 - Strongly Disagree
2 - Disagree
3 - Agree
4 - Strongly Agree
Please circle the number.
1.
This guidebook is very useful.
1
2.
2
3
4
The information provided in this guidebook is accurate.
1
2
3
4
If you chose 1 or 2 for question no. 2, please provide the number of the pages(s) that
contain the inaccurate information.
3.
The information provided in this guidebook is clear and easy to understand.
1
4.
4
2
3
4
I prefer to use the CD that is provided compared to this guidebook.
1
6.
3
Overall, I would rate the quality of this guidebook as good.
1
5.
2
2
3
4
If there is any other information that you think should be included in the guidebook,
please suggest in the space below.
Please send this feedback form to School’s General Office in the 4th week of
Semester I, Academic Session 2012/2013